Bmw 2010 535I Gran Turismo Owners Manual
2010-5seriesgranturismo 2010-5seriesgranturismo
2015-04-13
: Bmw Bmw-2010-535I-Gran-Turismo-Owners-Manual-694536 bmw-2010-535i-gran-turismo-owners-manual-694536 bmw pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 277
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Owner's Manual for Vehicle The Ultimate Driving Machine Contents A-Z Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 535i 550i Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐ tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐ chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive. BMW AG Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 © 2010 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. English III/10, 03 10 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Notes Mobility At a glance 12 19 25 27 Cockpit iDrive Voice activation system Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Controls 32 48 61 65 75 86 90 101 107 128 134 140 Opening and closing Adjusting Transporting children safely Driving Displays Lamps Safety Driving stability control systems Driving comfort Climate control Interior equipment Storage compartments 224 226 227 234 236 238 240 246 251 Refueling Fuel Wheels and tires Engine compartment Engine oil Maintenance Replacing components Breakdown assistance Care Reference 256 Technical data 259 Short commands for voice activation system 266 Everything from A to Z Driving tips 146 Things to remember when driving Navigation 154 Navigation At a glance Controls 6 204 Telephone 213 Contacts 216 BMW Assist Driving tips Using this Owner's Manual Communication Navigation The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 266. Communication Entertainment Contents Tone Radio CD/multimedia Rear entertainment Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 172 174 181 196 Mobility Entertainment Notes Notes Using this Owner's Manual Your individual vehicle The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic is by using the index. You have decided in favor of a vehicle with indi‐ vidualized equipment and features. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equipment available for a specific model. Additional sources of information Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time. As a result, the manual may contain accessories and equipment that you may not have specified for your own vehicle. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: bmwusa.com. All options and special equipment are marked with an asterisk *. Symbols For options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐ mentary Owner's Manuals. Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐ sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illustra‐ tions. ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐ tion. * Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional accessories, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing. "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐ lect individual functions. ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐ tivation system. ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system. Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment. Symbols on vehicle components Recommends that you study the relevant section of this Owner's Manual in connection with a particular part or assembly. Status at publication The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐ icy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle. For your own safety Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, re‐ quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐ ods. Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ ately trained personnel. 6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 BMW can assume responsibility for them. How‐ ever, we cannot assume any responsibility whatsoever for parts and accessories that have not been specifically approved by BMW. BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard. This guarantee is also not applicable when country-specific government approval has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential operat‐ ing conditions to which components might be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's own stringent quality standards. Parts and Accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐ cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐ chase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐ ously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐ fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐ stallation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐ ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐ sional advice on using these items, are available At a glance Controls Driving tips BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles. California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐ tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐ ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐ productive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. Navigation Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐ ine BMW parts and accessories, other products approved by BMW and related qualified advice. Communication Entertainment BMW recommends using parts and accessories approved by BMW for this purpose. Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ lowing warranties: ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty Mobility Parts and accessories from all BMW centers. Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐ ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkietalkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐ promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information. Maintenance, re‐ placement, or repair of the emission control de‐ vices and systems may be performed by any au‐ tomotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part. ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty 7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Notes ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty ▷ California Emission Control System Limited Warranty Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con‐ ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐ erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐ erate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐ tions or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information. rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about mo‐ tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5. Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐ tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐ 8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 9 Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance 10 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options. 11 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Cockpit Cockpit All around the steering wheel 1 Seating comfort functions* Night Vision with pedestrian de‐ tection* 123 Seat, mirror, steering wheel mem‐ ory* 57 Head-up Display* 126 Active seat* 50 7 2 Roller sunblinds* 45 3 Safety switch for the rear windows and roller sunblinds* 45 4 Power windows 44 5 Exterior mirror operation 58 6 Driver assistance systems* Lamps Front fog lamps 89 Parking lamps 86 Low beams 86 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion* 98 Automatic headlamp con‐ trol* 87 Collision warning* 112 Daytime running lights* 87 High-beam Assistant* 88 Lane departure warning* 97 Instrument lighting 89 8 Steering column stalk, left 12 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Voice activation* 25 High beams, head‐ lamp flasher 70 Telephone* 204 Rain sensor* 71 Computer* 78 Steering wheel buttons, left Resume speed 115, 109 Cruise control on/off, inter‐ rupt 114, 107 Increase distance* 109 Decrease distance* 108 10 Instrument cluster 14 13 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 65 14 Horn 15 Steering wheel heating* 60 16 Adjust the steering wheel 60 17 Open the tailgate* 39 18 Unlock the hood 11 Steering wheel buttons, right Entertainment source Mobility Volume Navigation Store speed 114, 108 13 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 9 Clean the windshields and head‐ lamps* 70 Driving tips Windshield wipers 70 Roadside parking lamps 87 Controls 12 Steering column stalk, right Communication Entertainment High-beam Assistant* 88 At a glance Turn signal 70 Cockpit Instrument cluster 1 Fuel gauge 77 6 External temperature* 75 2 Speedometer 7 Electronic displays 16 3 Indicator/warning lamps 14 8 Miles, trip miles 75 4 Tachometer 76 9 Clock* 80 5 Engine oil temperature 76 10 Reset miles 75 Indicator/warning lamps Instrument cluster Overview: indicator/warning lamps Symbol Function or system Turn signal Parking brake Automatic Hold The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning when the engine is started or the ig‐ nition is switched on, and light up briefly in the process. Front fog lamps* High beams 14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Engine functions Active Cruise Control* Brake system Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control* Brake system in Canadian models Cruise control* Antilock Brake System ABS Lane departure warning* Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana‐ dian models DSC Dynamic Stability Control DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps. Tire Pressure Monitor Flat Tire Monitor Safety belts Additional information on the Control Display, e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re‐ quired action, can be called up via Check Con‐ trol, refer to page 83. The text of urgent messages is displayed auto‐ matically. 15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Airbag system Supplementary text messages At a glance Parking lamps, headlamp control Controls Steering system Driving tips High-beam Assistant* Navigation Symbol Function or system Communication Entertainment Symbol Function or system Cockpit Instrument cluster, electronic displays 1 Symbols and messages, e.g., warnings 14 5 Selection list, e.g., radio 77 2 Range 77 6 Transmission displays 74 3 Computer* 78 4 Navigation display* 154 Service display 82 16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Headliner 18 2 Control Display 19 PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol* 115 3 Glove compartment 140 Top View* 118 4 Air vent 131 Backup camera* 120 Central locking system 38 6 Side View* 122 Hazard warning system 246 Radio 174 CD/Multimedia 181 7 Automatic climate control 128 8 Controller with buttons 19 9 Parking brake 66 11 Dynamic Driving Control 103 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 103 12 Transmission selector lever Mobility Auto Hold 68 17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 5 10 Communication Entertainment 1 Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance All around the center console Cockpit All around the headliner 1 Emergency Request* 246 4 Reading lamps* 89 2 Glass sunroof, powered* 45 5 Interior lamps 89 3 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbag* 92 18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The concept Switching off The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ ated from a central location. 1. At a glance iDrive Press the button. Controls 2. "Switch off control display" Using the iDrive during a trip Driving tips To avoid becoming distracted and posing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐ pants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traf‐ fic and road conditions allow this.◀ Controls at a glance Press the controller again to switch the screen back on. Controller Select menu items and create settings. 1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons Communication Entertainment 1. Turn. The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings. Control Display Navigation Switching on Controls 2. Press. Notes ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged. 19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions, refer to page 253. iDrive 3. Move in four directions. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu. Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected. 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted. Buttons on controller Press the button Function MENU Opens the main menu. RADIO Opens the Radio menu. CD Opens the CD/Multimedia menu. 2. Press the controller. Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings". NAV Opens the Navigation map view. TEL Opens the Telephone menu. BACK Displays the previous panel. After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. OPTION Opens the Options menu. ▷ Move the controller to the left. Changing between panels The current panel is closed and the previous panel is displayed. Operating concept Opening the main menu Press the button. The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed. ▷ Move the controller to the right. A new panel is opened on top of the previous display. The main menu is displayed. 20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed. View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: Controls ▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed. At a glance White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened. ▷ Press the menu button on the controller twice. Press the button. The "Options" menu is displayed. Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. Driving tips 3. Press the controller. Opening the Options menu 1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed. 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ Screen settings, for instance. "Split screen". This area remains unchanged. ▷ Control options for the selected main menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, e.g., "Store station". Changing settings 1. Select a field. 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date". 21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Communication Entertainment Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐ played. Mobility Setting the clock Reference Example: setting the clock Navigation The function is activated. The function is deactivated. iDrive 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. Radio symbols Symbol Meaning Traffic bulletins* switched on. One of the symbols is displayed. HD Radio* switched on. Satellite radio* switched on Telephone symbols 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. Symbol Meaning Incoming or outgoing call* Missed call* Wireless network reception strength*. Symbol flashes: network search Wireless network not available* Bluetooth* activated 6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller. Roaming* is active Text message received* 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller. Check SIM card* SIM card* blocked Status information SIM card* missing Status field Enter PIN* The following information is displayed in the sta‐ tus field at the top right: ▷ Time. ▷ Current entertainment source. Entertainment symbols Symbol Meaning ▷ Sound output, on/off. CD/DVD* player ▷ Wireless network reception strength. Music collection* ▷ Telephone status. Gracenote® database* ▷ Traffic bulletin reception. Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows. AUX-IN port Rear AUX-IN port* Rear AUX-IN port on the right* USB audio interface* 22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the computer. Saving a function In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu. 2. Switching the split screen on and off Running a function 1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" Selecting the display 1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is selected. 4. "Split screen content" 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds. Press the button. The function will run immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected. Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen. 5. Select the desired menu item. ▷ To display short information: touch the but‐ ton. ▷ To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period. 23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Controls General information Driving tips Split screen* The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu. Request current vehicle position* Navigation General information Communication Entertainment Spoken instructions* switched off Mobility Symbol Meaning Programmable memory buttons Reference Additional symbols iDrive Deleting the button assignments Entry comparison 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approx. five seconds. Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. 2. "OK" Entering letters and numbers 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ bers. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. ▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐ try for which data is available. ▷ Destination search: town/city names can be entered using the spelling of language avail‐ able on the Control Display. 3. "OK": confirm the entry. Symbol Function Press the controller: delete the letter or number. Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers. Enter a blank space. Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering letters and numbers: Symbol Function Enter the letters. Enter the numbers. Switching between upper and lower case letters Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering upper and lower case letters: Symbol Function Move the controller up: switch from upper to lower case letters. Move the controller up: switch from lower to upper case letters. 24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Requirements On the Control Display, set the language to be used with the voice activation system to enable the system to identify the voice commands. If, for example, ›Settings‹ is selected, the com‐ mands to the settings are read aloud. Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, irrespec‐ tive of which menu item is currently selected, e. g., ›Vehicle status‹. Set the language, refer to page 81. List of short voice activation commands, refer to page 259. Using voice activation Example: playing back a CD Activating the voice activation system 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary. Press the button on the steering 1. wheel. 2. Say the command. The command is displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. Press the button on the steering wheel. 3. ›C D and multimedia‹ The medium last played is played back. This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ cates that the voice activation system is active. 4. If no further commands are available, continue operating the equipment via the iDrive. 5. ›C D track ... ‹ e.g., CD track 4. Terminating the voice activation system Setting the voice dialog Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or ›Cancel‹. You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. Press the button on the steering wheel. In the shorter version of the voice dialog, the prompts and responses from the system are ab‐ breviated. 25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Controls Driving tips ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Man‐ ual to use with the voice activation system. Have the available spoken instructions read aloud using ›Voice commands‹. Navigation ▷ Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The system prompts you to make your entries. The commands available in each case depend on the menu item selected on the Control Dis‐ play. Communication Entertainment ▷ The system encompasses special micro‐ phones on the outer edge of the headliner. Having possible commands read aloud Mobility ▷ The voice activation system can be used to operate equipment by means of spoken commands. Possible commands Reference The concept At a glance Voice activation system* Voice activation system On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the setting. ▷ When selecting a radio station, use the com‐ mon pronunciation of the station name. ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof closed to prevent noise interference. ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking. Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐ tion until the desired volume is set. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed. ▷ The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use. Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐ ephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to page 246, in the vicinity of the interior mirror. Environmental conditions ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. 26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ Quick reference: "Quick reference" Opening via the iDrive ▷ Key word search: "Owner's Manual" To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu: ▷ Using pictures: "Search by pictures" 1. Press the button. 1. 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info". 3. Press the controller. 4. Select "Quick reference", "Search by pictures" or "Owner's Manual". Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: "Display Owner's Manual" Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual Leafing through the Owner's Manual Page by page with link access Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed. Page by page without link access Leaf through the pages directly while skipping the links. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to leaf from page to page. Leaf back. To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays: 1. Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. At a glance Controls The relevant information can be opened directly. Driving tips The following methods are available: 2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Man‐ ual. 4. Press the button again to return to the function displayed last. 5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. 27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility Methods of opening the Owner's Manual Context-sensitive help - section of the Owner's Manual referring to the present function Reference The Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display in accordance with the equip‐ ment selected. Leaf forward. Navigation Owner's Manual in the vehicle Communication Entertainment Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4 and 5. This opens a new panel every time. Programmable memory buttons General information The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23, and called up directly. Storing 1. Select "Owner's Manual" via the iDrive. 2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds. Executing Press the button. The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐ mediately. 28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 29 Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance 30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here. 31 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Opening and closing Opening and closing Remote control/key Integrated key Buttons on the remote control Press the button on the back of the remote con‐ trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2. 1 Unlocking The integrated key fits the following locks: 2 Locking ▷ Driver's door. 3 Opening the small tailgate 4 Panic mode*, headlamp courtesy delay fea‐ ture, opening the large tailgate* ▷ Storage compartment in the front center armrest. General information The storage compartment contains a switch for separately securing the tailgate, refer to page 41. The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls with keys. Replacing the battery Every remote control contains a replaceable battery. The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the vehicle, Personal Profile, refer to page 33. In addition, information about service require‐ ments is stored in the remote control, Service data in the remote control, refer to page 238. 1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control. 2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ ment; see arrow 2. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards. 5. Press the cover closed. Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐ ter or to your service center. 32 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Transmitting the settings ▷ Remote control malfunction. ▷ Interference of radio transmission to remote control by external sources. ▷ Discharged battery in the remote control. A message is displayed on the Control Display if an attempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine. Starting the engine in case of emergency detection of remote control Your personal settings can be taken with you to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐ file function. For more information, contact your service center. Transmission takes place via: ▷ The USB interface in the glove compart‐ ment onto a USB device. Profile management Opening the profiles A different profile can be called up than the one associated with the remote control currently in use. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" If a corresponding message appears on the Control Display, as shown, hold the remote con‐ trol against the marked area on the steering col‐ umn and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while depressing the brake. Personal Profile 3. Select a profile. You can set several of your vehicle's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. ▷ The settings are automatically saved in the profile currently activated. Mobility Renaming profiles The concept At a glance It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: Controls The individual settings are stored for up to three remote controls. Driving tips Emergency detection of remote control Navigation Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center. ▷ Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control. Loss of the remote controls Communication Entertainment You can obtain new remote controls from your service center. ▷ The remote control used is detected when the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile is called up. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" The current profile is selected. 3. Open "Options". 33 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference New remote controls Opening and closing 4. "Rename current profile" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Export profile" 4. USB interface, refer to page 140: "USB device" Display profile list during start The profile list can be displayed during each start for selecting the desired profile. 1. "Settings" Resetting profiles 2. "Profiles" 3. "Options" The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values. 4. "Display user list at startup" 1. "Settings" Personal Profile settings 2. "Profiles" The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. The current profile is selected. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reset current profile" Importing profiles Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile. 1. "Settings" More information on the settings can be found under: ▷ Active Cruise Control: collision warning, re‐ fer to page 112. ▷ Exterior mirror position, refer to page 58. ▷ CD/Multimedia, refer to page 181: audio source listened to last. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Dynamic Driving Control: sport program, re‐ fer to page 104. 3. "Import profile" ▷ Driver's seat position, refer to page 48. ▷ Programmable memory buttons, refer to page 23: assignment. ▷ Head-up Display, refer to page 126: selec‐ tion, brightness and position of display. ▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer to page 86: time setting. ▷ Tone, refer to page 172: tone settings. 4. USB interface, refer to page 140: "USB device" Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported. 1. "Settings" ▷ Automatic climate control, refer to page 128: settings. ▷ Steering wheel position, refer to page 60 ▷ Navigation, refer to page 154: map views, route criteria, voice output on/off. ▷ Night Vision with pedestrian detection, refer to page 123: selection of functions and type of display. 34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ Radio, refer to page 174: stored stations, station listened to last, special settings. ▷ Backup camera, refer to page 120: selec‐ tion of functions and type of display. ▷ Side View, refer to page 122: selection of the display type. ▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and courtesy lamps* are switched on and off. At a glance ▷ Park Distance Control PDC, refer to page 173: adjusting the signal tone volume. ▷ Anti-theft protection is switched on/off. Doors cannot be unlocked using the lock buttons or the door opener. ▷ The alarm system*, refer to page 42, is armed or disarmed. Operating from the inside Controls ▷ Daytime running lights*, refer to page 87: current setting. Driving tips ▷ Language on the Control Display, refer to page 81. ▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 97: last setting, on/off. ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 98: last setting, on/off. The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed. The system simultaneously engages and re‐ leases the locks on the following: ▷ Doors. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on. Opening and closing: from the outside Using the remote control ▷ Tailgate. General information ▷ Fuel filler flap. Operating from the outside ▷ Via the remote control. ▷ Via the driver's door lock. ▷ Via the door handles*. ▷ Via the button on the tailgate*. The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote control: Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.◀ Unlocking Navigation If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. Communication Entertainment Central locking system Via the button for the central locking system. Mobility ▷ Locking the vehicle, refer to page 38: after a brief period or after starting to drive. Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked. You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. 35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference ▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 70. Opening and closing The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. with the vehicle locked. 1. "Settings" Panic mode* 2. "Door locks" You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. 3. "Unlock button:" Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button. Switching on the headlamp courtesy delay feature Briefly press the button on the remote control. 4. Select the desired function: ▷ "Driver's door only" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ locks the entire vehicle. ▷ "All doors" The duration, refer to page 86, can be set in the Control Display. Opening the tailgate Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. The small tailgate opens slightly. The entire vehicle is unlocked. Convenient opening The remote control can be used to simultane‐ ously open the windows and the glass sunroof*. Press and hold the button on the re‐ mote control. The windows and the glass sunroof* open. Releasing the button stops the motion. Locking Press the button on the remote control. Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ edge.◀ Switching on the interior lamps, courtesy lamps*, and welcome lamps Press the button on the remote control The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐ fore opening. With automatic trunk lid operation*: Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and release. The large tailgate opens automatically. Note the opening height of the large tail‐ gate The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result.◀ The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do not place the remote control into the trunk. The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed. Provide edge protection 36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Confirmation signals from the vehicle ▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐ ence, and ▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock" Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Driving tips Using the door lock Navigation General information Malfunction Local radio waves may interfere with the remote control. If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐ locked with the remote control, the battery is discharged. Replace the battery, refer to page 32. If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the door lock using the key. For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following: FCC ID: Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ edge.◀ Remove the key before pulling the door handle Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.◀ In some country-specific versions, the alarm system*, refer to page 42, is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. Unlock the vehicle using the remote control to switch off the alarm. ▷ LX8766S. ▷ LX8766E. ▷ LX8CAS. Convenient operation* ▷ LX8CAS2. The door lock can be used to simultaneously operate the windows and the glass sunroof*. ▷ MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: 37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Communication Entertainment 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐ tion signals. ▷ this device must accept any interference re‐ ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Mobility 2. "Door locks" Reference 1. "Settings" At a glance This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Controls Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protection.◀ Opening and closing Opening/closing ▷ "Lock if no door is opened" With the door closed, turn the key to the Unlock or Lock position and hold it there. Turning the key back to the original position stops the motion. Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure that no one becomes trapped; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened. ▷ "Lock after start. to drive" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away. Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock the vehicle using a key via the door lock on the driver's door. Opening and closing: from the inside Doors Automatic Soft Closing To close the doors, push lightly. It is closed automatically. Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Locking and unlocking Press the button in the vehicle. Tailgate The doors and the tailgate are locked or unlocked when the front doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft. Opening The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. You can set how the vehicle should be unlocked; refer to Unlocking, refer to page 35. Opening the small tailgate Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐ fore opening. Automatic locking The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. Select the desired function: 38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. ▷ Push the button in the driver's foot‐ well. The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is sta‐ tionary, provided that the tailgate has not been locked. Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐ tion.◀ Opening the large tailgate Note the opening height of the large tail‐ gate Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐ gate. Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐ gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Automatic Soft Closing To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly only. It is closed automatically. Communication Entertainment ▷ Navigation ▷ Press the button on the tailgate, arrow 1. Driving tips Controls Closing At a glance wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐ tion.◀ Locking the vehicle* The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result.◀ Press the button on the open tailgate. Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heating Automatic trunk lid operation* Adjusting the opening height You can set how far the large tailgate should open. 39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Press the button on the tailgate, arrow 2, and open the tailgate. Mobility The vehicle is locked completely. Opening and closing Adjusting the opening height When setting the opening height, ensure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the ceiling may not be high enough for the open tailgate if the load situation changes.◀ 1. "Settings" 2. "Tailgate" 3. Turn the controller until the desired opening height is selected. control for approx. 1 second and re‐ lease. Pressing the button again stops the motion. The opening process is interrupted as well: ▷ When the vehicle starts moving. ▷ By pressing the button in the driver's foot‐ well. ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Opening the large tailgate further Opening the large tailgate Note the opening height of the large tail‐ gate The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result. Press and hold the button on the inside of the large tailgate, arrow 2, to open the large tailgate to the maximum opening height. Releasing the button stops the motion. Closing the large tailgate Adjust the opening height of the large tailgate according to the given situation.◀ The large tailgate opens automatically to the ad‐ justed opening height. ▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of the large tailgate. The tailgate closes automatically. Pressing again stops the motion. ▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐ gate, arrow 2. ▷ Press the button on the remote 40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Press the button on the open tailgate. Pressing again stops the motion. The closing process is not interrupted when the vehicle starts moving. Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐ gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and smooth motion. Locking separately The tailgate can be locked separately, using the switch in the front center armrest. ▷ The tailgate is locked, ar‐ row 1. The small and large tailgates are locked. The tailgate is unlocked. Comfort Access* The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment. Communication Entertainment Pull the handle inside the trunk. ▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐ gate, arrow 2. Navigation Driving tips Emergency unlocking* Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. ▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately. ▷ Starting the engine. Mobility Tailgate closes automatically and the vehi‐ cle is locked. Functional requirements ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle. 41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference ▷ With Comfort Access: When the center armrest is locked, the tailgate cannot be accessed. This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked using valet service. The infra‐ red remote control can be handed out without the key. At a glance Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This secures the tailgate and disconnects it from the central locking system. Controls ▷ The tailgate is unlocked, ar‐ row 2. Opening and closing ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. ▷ The engine can only be started if the remote control is inside the vehicle. Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access. Unlocking This corresponds to pressing the button. Press the right-hand button on the exterior of the tailgate to open the large tailgate. This corresponds to pressing the button. Ignition on Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐ nition on. When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal; otherwise, the engine will start. Malfunction Comfort Access may not function properly if it experiences interference from local radio waves, e.g., mobile phones. If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use a key in the door lock. Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre‐ button. sponds to pressing the Locking To subsequently start the engine, hold the re‐ mote control against the marked area on the steering column, refer to page 33. Alarm system* The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to: ▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate. ▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion sensor, refer to page 43. ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐ tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car. Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. ▷ Interruptions in battery voltage. This corresponds to pressing the ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm. button. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con‐ sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐ hicle. Unlocking the tailgate separately Press the middle button on the exterior of the tailgate, refer to page 38, to open the small tail‐ gate. The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: ▷ By switching on the hazard warning system. ▷ By flashing the high beams. Arming and disarming the alarm system When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time. 42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm on some country-specific versions. Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror This alarm can only be ended by pressing the button on the remote control. At a glance Door lock and armed alarm system Tailgate and armed alarm system Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and release. The large tailgate opens automatically. Note the opening height of the large tail‐ gate The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result.◀ After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐ tored again by the alarm system. The hazard warning system flashes once. Panic mode* The system is armed. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ cured. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. The interior motion sensor is not active. ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: The vehicle has not been tampered with. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine is started, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered. Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. Switching off the alarm ▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control. ▷ Unlock the vehicle via the driver's door lock using the key*. ▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the remote control with you, pull on the door handle. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car. Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly. Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐ lowing situations: Driving tips With automatic trunk lid operation*: Navigation ▷ ▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: Communication Entertainment The small tailgate opens slightly. Mobility Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at sea or on a trailer. 43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference ▷ Controls The tailgate can be opened using the remote control, even if the alarm system is armed. Opening and closing ▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle. Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the button on the remote control twice in succession. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ onds and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again. Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; other‐ wise, injuries may result.◀ ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held. ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically. Pressing the switch stops the motion. Power windows Convenience operation, refer to page 36, via the remote control or the door lock. General information Pinch protection system Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the power windows and injure themselves.◀ If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted. The window reopens slightly. Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ tection Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀ Window accessories Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ Opening Closing without the pinch protection system ▷ For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows: Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held. ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point. The window opens automatically. Pressing again stops the motion. Closing Danger of pinching 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec‐ tion. 44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Driver's door controls Safety switch The following functions can be locked simulta‐ neously, using the switch: ▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows using the switches in the rear. Controls ▷ Operation of the roller sunblinds* using the switches in the rear. ▷ Adjustment of the power rear seats*. ▷ Adjustment of the power head restraints* in the rear. Driving tips Rear door controls Safety switch for rear operation Navigation Press the safety switch when transporting children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without supervision.◀ To deactivate the function, the vehicle must be in at least the radio ready state. Roller sunblinds* General information The safety switch in the driver's door can be used to prevent children, for example, from op‐ erating the roller blinds using the switches in the rear. Press the safety switch in the driver's door. The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on. If you are no longer able to move the roller blinds after having activated them consecutively a number of times, the system is blocked for a limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐ tem cool. The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low in‐ terior temperatures. Roller blind for the side windows Press the button. The roller blind can only be extended or re‐ tracted when the side window is closed. Raising and lowering the roller blinds together Press the button. Communication Entertainment The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on. Press the button. Panoramic glass sunroof* General information The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be operated together or separately, using the same switch. The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐ tion is switched on. 45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility Press the button. Roller blinds for rear side windows Reference Switching on and off Opening and closing Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐ selves.◀ The sliding visor moves automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Opening/closing the glass sunroof When the sliding visor is open, proceed as de‐ scribed under Sliding visor. Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together Press the switch twice in the de‐ sired direction past the resist‐ ance point. The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐ sor move together. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Convenience operation, refer to page 36, via the remote control or the door lock. Comfort position Raising the glass sunroof Press the switch briefly. ▷ The closed roof is raised and the sliding visor opens slightly. ▷ The opened roof closes until it is in its raised position. The sliding visor stays completely open. Pressing the switch again closes the sliding visor al‐ most completely. Sliding visor with raised roof Do not use force to close the sliding visor, as this may damage the mechanism.◀ Opening/closing the sliding visor ▷ Press the switch in the de‐ sired direction to the resist‐ ance point and hold it there. The sliding visor moves while the switch is being held. In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise in the passenger com‐ partment. Every time the glass sunroof is opened or closed completely, it stops in the comfort position. If desired, continue the movement by pressing the switch. Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or from the raised position during closing. The glass sunroof opens again slightly. Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ tection Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.◀ ▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point. 46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Closing without the pinch protection system For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐ ceed as follows: 1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐ ance point and hold. Controls Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐ opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value. Driving tips 2. Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without pinch protection. Initializing after a power failure After a power failure, it may only be possible to operate the roof to a limited extent. 47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Have the system initialized by your service cen‐ ter. Adjusting Adjusting Sitting safely 4 Lumbar support* The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐ tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. 5 Height 6 Backrest The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 53. Adjustments in detail: partially powered seats ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 55. ▷ Airbags, refer to page 90. Front seats Adjusting Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat while driving. The seat could respond with unexpected move‐ ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀ Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Forward/back: Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐ erly. Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐ ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.◀ At a glance: partially powered seats Seat tilt: Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat en‐ gages properly. 1 Thigh support* 2 Tilt 3 Forward/backward 48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Controls 1. Forward/back. At a glance Adjustments in detail: power* seats Height: Move the button in the required direction. Navigation Driving tips 2. Height. Backrest tilt: 3. Seat tilt. Communication Entertainment At a glance: power* seats 1 Lumbar support* 2 Backrest width* 3 Shoulder support* 4 Backrest 5 Forward/back, height, tilt 6 Thigh support* Mobility 4. Backrest tilt. 49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Move the button in the required direction. Adjusting Shoulder support* 5. Thigh support*. Lumbar support* The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture. Also supports the back in the shoulder area: ▷ Results in a relaxed seating position. ▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles. Active seat* Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐ tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain. ▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch. The curvature is increased/decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower section of the switch. Press the button. The LED lights up. The curvature is shifted up/down. Backrest width* Seat heating* Change the width of the backrest using the side wings to adjust the lateral support. Switching on To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the backrest width temporarily opens fully. Press the button once for each temper‐ ature level. 50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit. Switching off After a short time, the system automatically moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐ cessive cooling. Press the button longer. The LEDs go out. At a glance The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. Press the button longer. The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐ rest can be distributed in different ways. The LEDs go out. 1. "Climate" Rear seats 2. "Seat heating distribution" 3. Select the required seat. Adjusting 4. Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution. Active seat ventilation* The seat surface is cooled by means of the in‐ tegrated fan. Forward/backward 2 Backrest Adjustments in detail: manually adjustable seats Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the seat while driving. Otherwise, the restraining effect of the seat can be limited in an accident.◀ Mobility The ventilation rapidly cools the seat, e.g., if the vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous cooling at high temperatures. 1 Communication Entertainment Navigation At a glance: manually adjustable seats Driving tips Temperature distribution* Controls Switching off Press the button once for each ventila‐ tion level. Forward/back: 51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Switching on Adjusting Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. Adjustments in detail: power* seats 1. Forward/back. After releasing the level, move the seat forward or back slightly until it engages. 2. Backrest tilt. Backrest tilt: Pull the lever and apply your weight to the back‐ rest or lift it off. At a glance: power* seats 3. Head restraint. 1 Forward/backward 2 Shoulder support 3 Backrest, head restraint The seats cannot be adjusted if the safety switch for the power windows has been pressed. Shoulder support* Also supports the back in the shoulder area: ▷ Results in a relaxed seating position. 52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 4. Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution. Maintain pressure on the button until the system completes the adjustment. Active seat ventilation* Switching on Press the button once for each ventila‐ tion level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit. Switching off Press the button longer. Switching off The LEDs go out. Press the button longer. The LEDs go out. Safety belts Temperature distribution The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐ rest can be distributed in different ways. 1. "Climate" 2. "Seat heating rear" General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. 53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility Press the button once for each temper‐ ature level. Reference Switching on Communication Entertainment Navigation Seat heating* At a glance Reset* to standard position Controls 3. Select the required seat. Driving tips ▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles. Adjusting Seats with safety belt Buckling the belt The vehicle has four or five* seating positions, each of which is equipped with a safety belt. ▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted. ▷ The two rear safety belt buckles, integrated into the rear seat, are for passengers sitting on the left and right. ▷ The belt buckle embossed with the word CENTER is intended exclusively for use by passengers riding in the center position. One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐ pact and injure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐ ble objects, or be pinched.◀ Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced.◀ Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle. Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel. Safety belt reminder for driver's and front passenger seat The indicator lamp flashes or lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐ tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐ senger seat. Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked. Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.◀ 54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Adjusting the height: manual head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. At a glance Front head restraints Controls Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.◀ Navigation Active head restraint In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain severity, the active head restraint automatically reduces the distance from the head. Reduced protective function ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint cov‐ ers. ▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers, on the head restraints. ▷ Do not attach accessories to the seat or head restraint. Adjusting electrically. Distance to the back of the head: manual head restraints Otherwise, the protective function of the active head restraint will be impaired and the personal safety of the occupants will be endangered.◀ ▷ Forward: pull. ▷ Back: press the button and push the head restraint toward the rear. 55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Communication Entertainment Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjusting the height: power* head restraints Mobility Distance ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down. Reference Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐ proximately at ear level. Driving tips ▷ To raise: pull. Height Adjusting Distance to the back of the head: power* head restraints Adjusting the height: manual head restraints The head restraint is automatically repositioned when the shoulder support is adjusted, refer to page 50. Adjusting the side extensions* ▷ To raise: pull. ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down. Fold forward for increased lateral support in the resting position. Adjusting the height: power* head restraints Removing The head restraints cannot be removed. Rear head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. Move the switch in the desired direction. Adjusting* the side sections Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.◀ Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐ proximately at ear level. Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐ ing position. Removing: manual head restraints Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. 56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ able.◀ Removing: power* head restraints For technical reasons, the head restraint cannot be removed. Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory* General information Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position. 3. Controls Press the button on the door. The LED in the button lights up. 4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED goes out. If the M button is pressed accidentally: Press the button on the door again. The LED goes out. Calling up settings Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an accident.◀ Front Driving tips Before transporting passengers Two different seat positions can be stored and retrieved. Comfort function 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Switch off the ignition. Navigation 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely. Communication Entertainment 1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as pos‐ sible. At a glance Rear The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐ ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed. Safety mode 1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐ nition. 57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions can be stored and re‐ trieved for each remote control. The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored. The corresponding seat position is performed automatically. Mobility 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. Adjusting 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is completed. Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power. Mirrors Exterior mirrors General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's mirror. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: ▷ Open or close the door or tailgate. ▷ Press a button on the remote control. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button. Calling up with the remote control The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel position selected last is stored for the currently used remote control. Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.◀ At a glance Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure that the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or objects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀ The adjustment procedure is interrupted: ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed. ▷ When a memory button is touched. 1 Adjusting 1. "Settings" 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor* 2. "Door locks" 3 Fold in and out* 3. "Last seat position auto." Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the mirror changeover switch. Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direction in which the button is pressed. Saving positions* Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 57. Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass. 58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐ senger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for example. Interior rearview mirror Reducing the blinding effect 1. Controls Activating At a glance Automatic Curb Monitor* Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver's mirror position. From behind when driving at night: turn the knob. Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐ senger's mirror position. Fold in and out Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature* Driving tips 2. Engage transmission position R. Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. For example, this is advantageous ▷ In car washes. ▷ In narrow streets. Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before entering an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐ pending on the width of the vehicle.◀ Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running. Photocells are used for control: ▷ In the mirror glass. ▷ On the back of the mirror. For proper operation: ▷ Keep the photocells clean. ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield. Steering wheel General information Adjusting while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.◀ 59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. Reference ▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded away manually. Communication Entertainment Navigation Press the button. Adjusting Manual steering wheel adjustment 1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ tion. 3. Fold the lever back. Power* steering wheel adjustment The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐ rections. Storing the position Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 57. Steering wheel heating* Switching on/off Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. 60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat. Transporting children in the rear Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in‐ jury in an accident. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.◀ Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ straint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au‐ tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 91. Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint fixing system.◀ Controls Before mounting a child restraint fixing system on the rear middle seat, return both outer backr‐ ests to the basic position. Notes Manufacturer's information for child re‐ straint fixing systems To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐ tective effect can be impaired.◀ In the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐ senger side are deactivated. Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint fixing system.◀ Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the middle po‐ sition to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. Do not change the seat position and height after this. Driving tips Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.◀ Before mounting Navigation Children in the vehicle Communication Entertainment Note Installing child restraint fixing systems Mobility The right place for children At a glance Transporting children safely Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest 61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Backrest width* Transporting children safely width, refer to page 50, completely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position. Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, the backrest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀ Child seat security Note Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐ ing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufacturer; oth‐ erwise, the level of protection may be re‐ duced.◀ Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐ chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐ ing system is resting snugly against the back‐ rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.◀ The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems. Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with the belt. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked. Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐ cated behind the seat cover between the back‐ rest and the seat cushion at the marked loca‐ tions. Exposing the lower LATCH anchors Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐ pletely. LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐ dren. 1. Reach between the seat cushion and the backrest. 2. Detach the seat cover from the Velcro® fas‐ tener. 62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐ ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐ straint fixing system. Child restraint fixing systems with a tether strap Mounting points At a glance 3. Pull the seat cover forward. Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems without power rear seats 2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest back slightly. 3. Fold the leather cover on the seat forward. 1. Before mounting, adjust the seats to their basic position, refer to page 53. 2. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer to the operating instructions of the system. 3. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly connected. LATCH mounting eyes Only use the mounting eyes for the upper LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.◀ Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in the event of an accident.◀ 1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint. 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point/eye 63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Navigation Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems on power rear seats* Fold up the middle mounting point. Communication Entertainment 6. After mounting the system, move the back‐ rest back up slightly so that the child re‐ straint fixing system rests against the back‐ rest. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are two outer or three mounting points for child re‐ straint fixing systems with a tether strap. Mobility 5. Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child re‐ straint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest. Reference 4. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer to the operating instructions of the system. Driving tips Controls 1. Move the seat to its rearmost position. Transporting children safely 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Raise the head restraint. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint. 3. Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to the mounting eyes. 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down. 5. Lower the head restraint. Locking the doors and windows Rear doors Push the locking lever on the rear doors down. The door can now be opened from the outside only. Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the rear. This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 45. 64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system, the ignition switches off auto‐ matically. Ignition on Radio ready state Press the Start/Stop button and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. This state can only be reached by pressing the Start/Stop button briefly to switch off the engine while it is running. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐ main ready for operation. Radio ready state switches off automatically: ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system. The ignition switches off automatically: ▷ During locking when the low beams are switched on. Starting the engine ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. General information Enclosed areas ▷ When the engine is switched off and the ig‐ nition is switched on, the system automati‐ cally switches to radio ready state when the door is opened, if the light is switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on. Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ Ignition off Do not leave the car unattended with the engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐ tial source of danger. Press the Start/Stop button again and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. Unattended vehicle Before leaving the car with the engine running, set the parking brake and place the transmission in position P or neutral to prevent the car from moving.◀ Frequent starting in quick succession 65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Controls The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed when you press the Start/Stop button. Driving tips When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an automatic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀ Navigation Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. Communication Entertainment The concept Transmission position P with the ignition off Mobility Start/Stop button Reference Driving Driving Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting the car and avoid starting the car frequently in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, and there is the danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic con‐ verter.◀ Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod‐ erate engine speeds. Starting the engine Press on the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button. The engine is cranked until it starts. 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Engage transmission position N. 3. Release the parking brake or deactivate Au‐ tomatic Hold, refer to page 68. 4. Switch the engine off. Transmission position P with the ignition off When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an automatic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀ Transmission position P is engaged automati‐ cally: ▷ When the ignition is switched off. ▷ After approx. 15 minutes if the vehicle is not moved. Engine stop General information Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the windows and injure them‐ selves.◀ Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐ cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀ Switching off the engine 1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐ hicle stopped. Parking brake The concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked. ▷ Engine switched off: the parking brake acts on the rear wheels. ▷ Engine running: the parking brake acts on the disc brakes of the front and rear wheels via the hydraulic brake system. The parking brake can be set manually or auto‐ matically: ▷ Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch. ▷ Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold, re‐ fer to page 68. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. The radio ready state is switched on. 3. Set the parking brake. Before driving into a car wash The vehicle is able to roll when the following steps are adhered to: 66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The LED lights up. The indicator lamp lights up in red. The parking brake is set. Indicator lamp in Canadian models 1. Secure the vehicle against rolling. 2. Manually release the parking brake. Unlocking 1. Raise the rear floor cover in the trunk, ar‐ row 1, and fasten it with a retaining strap. While driving At a glance Pull the switch. If it also becomes necessary to release the transmission lock of the automatic transmission manually, follow this sequence: Use while driving: Driving tips Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the button is being pulled. Controls Setting The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig‐ nal sounds and the brake lamps light up. Indicator lamp in Canadian models Press the switch while the brake pedal is pressed or transmission position P is en‐ gaged. The LED and indicator lamp go out. The parking brake is released. Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot release the parking brake.◀ 3. Take out the floor trim in the trunk, removing the clips with a screw driver, arrows. Manual release The parking brake can be released manually in the event of a power failure or electrical fault. Communication Entertainment 2. Remove the release tool from the tool kit. Releasing Navigation If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set. Before releasing, secure the vehicle against rolling Secure the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the inclination of the road, e.g., with a wheel chock; otherwise, there is the danger of the ve‐ hicle rolling.◀ 67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Before releasing the parking brake manually, and whenever you park the vehicle with the parking brake released, ensure that position P of the automatic transmission is engaged. Driving 4. Hook the release tool into the release point, arrow. 2. Press the switch with the brake de‐ pressed or transmission position P en‐ gaged. It may take several seconds for the brake to be put into operation. Any sounds associated with this are normal. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation. Indicator lamp in Canadian models 5. Forcefully pull the release tool up against the resistance until you notice a marked in‐ crease in the resistance and the parking brake releases audibly. Automatic Hold The concept This system assists the driver by automatically setting and releasing the parking brake, such as when moving in stop-and-go traffic. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary. On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving away. Have the malfunction corrected If the parking brake has been released manually in response to a malfunction, only technicians can return it to operation. Have the malfunction corrected by your service center.◀ After a power failure Only put the parking brake into operation after a power failure The parking brake should only be put into oper‐ ation again if it was manually released due to an interruption in the supply of electrical power. Otherwise, it cannot be ensured that the parking brake will function properly.◀ Putting the parking brake into operation For your safety Automatic Hold is deactivated automatically and the parking brake is set when: ▷ The engine is switched off. ▷ A door is opened and the driver's safety belt is unbuckled. ▷ The vehicle is braked to a standstill with the parking brake while driving. 1. Switch on the ignition. 68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ Reactivate Automatic Hold. Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐ mission and ensure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀ Activating Press the button. The LED and the letters AUTO H light up. The indicator lamp lights up. Automatic Hold is activated. Deactivating Press the button again. The LED and the letters AUTO H go The parking brake is automatically set if the en‐ gine is switched off while the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold. The indicator lamp changes from green to red. The parking brake is not set if the engine is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐ ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐ vated. The parking brake can also be released after the engine is switched off, e.g., in a car wash. Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot release the parking brake.◀ out. Malfunction Automatic Hold is deactivated. In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving it. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, press on the brake pedal to deactivate it. When the parking brake, refer to page 66, is set manually, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto‐ matically. At a glance Parking Controls ▷ Release the parking brake manually. Driving Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto‐ matically secured against rolling when it stops. Driving tips Before driving away: Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta‐ tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.◀ Navigation Indicator lamp in Canadian models Before driving into a car wash Communication Entertainment The indicator lamp switches from green to red and the letters AUTO H go out. The indicator lamp lights up in green. Mobility Press on the accelerator to drive away. The brake is released automatically. The indicator lamp goes out. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian 69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference models Driving Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher High beams, headlamp flasher Turn signal ▷ High beams, arrow 1. ▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2. Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐ sistance point. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐ dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated: 1. "Settings" Washer/wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐ zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.◀ Switching on 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal" Press the wiper levers up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once. Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash. The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary. ▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary. 70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Rain sensor sensitivity Press the wiper levers down. Turn the thumb wheel. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. Washing the windshield, headlamps ▷ Brief wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice. Driving tips Controls At a glance Switching off and brief wipe Rain sensor In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular intervals when the vehicle lights are switched on. Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures Press the button on the wiper lever. When activated, the wipers move over the wind‐ shield once. The LED in the steering column stalk lights up. Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐ age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐ tion.◀ Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐ erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.◀ Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated* whenever the ignition is switched on. 71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Communication Entertainment The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ shield and activates the wipers briefly. Mobility Activating/deactivating the rain sensor Pull the lever. Reference The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror. Navigation The time between wipes is controlled automat‐ ically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. Driving Fold-out position of the wipers Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example. 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐ shield. 3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position. After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system, refer to page 70, must be reactivated. Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.◀ All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐ voir. Fill with water and – if required – with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐ ommendations. Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio. Capacity approx. 5.3 US quarts/ 5 liters 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers move to their resting position and are ready for operation. Automatic transmission with Steptronic Transmission positions Washer fluid D Drive, automatic position General information Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep it away from sources of ignition. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the instructions on the container.◀ Container for washer fluid Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐ ward gears are available. R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary. N is Neutral Use in automatic car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll. When the ignition is switched off, refer to page 65, position P is engaged automatically. P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically: ▷ After the engine is switched off, if the car is in radio ready state, refer to page 65, or if the 72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance ignition is switched off, refer to page 65, and if position R or D is engaged. ▷ If the ignition is switched off and position N is engaged. ▷ Engage R. Driving tips ▷ Shift out of P. Engaging P ▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐ gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed. Depress the brake until you start driv‐ ing To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pres‐ sure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀ Navigation ▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock. Press button P. Sport program and manual mode M/S Activating the sport program Engaging D, R and N Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position. Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐ mission position D. DS is displayed in the instrument cluster. This position is recommended for a perform‐ ance-oriented driving style. 73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Communication Entertainment Engaging the transmission position Press the Unlock button to: Mobility Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the accelerator beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. Reference Kickdown Controls ▷ If the vehicle is standing with position R or D engaged and you unfasten the belt of the driver's seat and open the driver's door. Driving Activating the M/S manual mode Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐ mission position D. Push the selector lever forward or backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g., M1. ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward. ▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐ ward. The transmission only shifts up or down if the rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the engine speed is too high, the transmission does not shift down. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument panel, followed by the current gear. Ending the sport program/manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Displays in the instrument cluster The transmission position is dis‐ played, e.g., P. 74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Displays Instrument cluster 1 Fuel gauge 6 External temperature* 2 Speedometer 7 Electronic displays 3 Indicator/warning lamps 8 Miles, trip miles 4 Tachometer 9 Clock* 5 Oil temperature 10 Display/reset miles ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. External temperature External temperature warning If the display drops to +37 ℉/ +3 ℃, a signal sounds. A message is displayed in the in‐ strument cluster. Press the knob. ▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time, external temper‐ ature and odometer are dis‐ played. ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset. There is the increased danger of ice. Mobility ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. Ice on roads Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on roads. 75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Odometer and trip odometer Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Displays Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐ ger of an accident.◀ Engine oil temperature Time The time is displayed at the bot‐ tom of the instrument cluster. Setting the time and time format, refer to page 80. Date The date is displayed in the in‐ strument cluster. Setting the date and date format, refer to page 80. Tachometer ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem‐ perature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds. ▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointer is in the middle or in the right half of the tem‐ perature display. ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐ perature end. Switch off the engine imme‐ diately and allow it to cool down. Check the oil level, refer to page 236. Current fuel consumption Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine. Coolant temperature Should the coolant, and with it the engine, be‐ come too hot, a warning message is displayed. Check the coolant level, refer to page 237. Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmen‐ tally-friendly manner. Displaying the current fuel consumption 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators" The bar display for the current fuel consumption is displayed in the instrument cluster. 76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The energy of motion of the ve‐ hicle is converted to electrical en‐ ergy while coasting, refer to page 151. The vehicle battery is partially charged and fuel con‐ sumption can be lowered. Fuel gauge The bar display for the cruising range is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. Selection lists in the instrument cluster Controls At a glance 3. "Additional indicators" Driving tips Energy regeneration The concept Fuel capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary. Notes on refueling, refer to page 224. Range ▷ A message appears briefly. ▷ The remaining range is shown on the computer. The message appears continuously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. The following functions can be operated using the buttons and the thumb wheel on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster: ▷ Current audio source. ▷ Redial on telephone*. ▷ Activation of the voice activation system*. Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range 30 miles/ 50 km, or engine functions are not ensured and damage may occur.◀ Mobility Displaying the cruising range 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference After the reserve range is reached: Communication Entertainment Navigation Gasoline engine: Displays Activating a list and creating the setting ▷ Speed Limit Display*. ▷ Time of arrival* After entering the distance or when desti‐ nation guidance is activated in the naviga‐ tion system. ▷ Distance to destination* After entering the distance or when desti‐ nation guidance is activated in the naviga‐ tion system. ▷ Arrow view of navigation system* Press a button on the right side of the steering wheel or turn the thumb wheel to activate the required list. Create the setting using the thumb wheel. Computer When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. Adjusting the info display You can select what information from the com‐ puter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster. 1. "Settings" Calling up information on the info display 2. "Info display" 3. Select the desired displays. Press the computer button on the turn signal lever. Speed limit Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster. Display of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued. Information at a glance Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be‐ low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/ 5 km/h. Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever displays the information on the info dis‐ play in the following order: ▷ Range. ▷ Average fuel consumption. Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" ▷ Average speed. ▷ Date*. 78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 1. "Vehicle Info" 4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed. 5. Press the controller. The speed limit is stored. Activating/deactivating the limit 3. "Reset": all values are reset. "Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a standstill. 1. "Settings" Driving tips Controls 2. "Trip computer" At a glance Resetting the trip computer 3. "Warning at:" 2. "Speed" 4. Press the controller. Applying your current speed as the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Select current speed" Display on the Control Display 4. Press the controller. Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display. The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit. Resetting values 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" The average fuel consumption and average speed can be reset. Resetting the fuel consumption and speed Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever. 1. "Vehicle Info" Communication Entertainment Navigation 3. "Warning" 2. "Onboard info" Mobility Trip computer There are two types of computer. ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as often as necessary. 79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an over‐ view of the current trip. Displays 3. "Cons." or "Speed" 6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed. 7. Press the controller. The time is stored. Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. 4. "Yes" The time format is stored. Settings on the Control Display Date Time 1. "Settings" Setting the date 2. "Time/Date" Setting the time 3. "Date:" 1. "Settings" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed. 2. "Time/Date" 5. Press the controller. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month and year. The date is stored. Setting the date format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time:" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed. The date format is stored. 5. Press the controller. 80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 4. Select the desired dialog. Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display: At a glance Language 1. "Settings" Controls 2. "Language/Units" Setting the units of measure To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis‐ tance and temperature: 3. "Language:" 1. "Settings" Driving tips Units of measure 4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Setting the voice dialog To switch between a standard dialog and a short dialog. 1. "Settings" 4. Select the desired unit. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Brightness 2. "Language/Units" Setting the brightness 3. "Speech mode:" To set the brightness of the Control Display: Communication Entertainment 3. Select the desired menu item. Navigation 2. "Language/Units" 1. "Settings" 81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility 2. "Control display" Displays 3. "Brightness" 2. "Vehicle status" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set. 3. "Service required" 5. Press the controller. Required maintenance procedures and le‐ gally mandated inspections are displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness control may not be clearly visible. Service requirements Display The driving distance or the time to the next service is displayed briefly after the ignition is switched on. The current service require‐ ments can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist. Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐ matically transmitted to your service center be‐ fore a service due date, Automatic Service Re‐ quest, refer to page 217. Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re‐ quired can be displayed on the Control Display. 1. "Vehicle Info" 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion. Symbols Symbols Description No service is currently required. The deadline for service or a le‐ gally mandated inspection is approaching. Please make a service appointment. The service deadline has al‐ ready passed. Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections. Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly. 1. "Vehicle Info" 82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 6. Create the settings. 7. Confirm. The entered date is stored. Automatic Service Request Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐ matically transmitted to your service center be‐ fore a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request" Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on. Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps. Supplementary text messages Additional information on the Control Display, e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re‐ quired action, can be called up via Check Con‐ trol. The text of urgent messages is displayed auto‐ matically. Hiding Check Control messages Check Control The concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display*. In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Dis‐ play. Press the computer button on the turn signal lever. ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ played continuously and are not cleared un‐ til the malfunction is eliminated. If several 83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Controls Driving tips 5. "Date:" Navigation 4. "§ Vehicle inspection" The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Communication Entertainment 3. "Service required" Mobility Indicator/warning lamps Reference 2. "Vehicle status" Displays malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ played again automatically. ▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later. Displaying stored Check Control messages The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐ tion. Speed limit detection assists the driver and does not replace the human eye.◀ Switching on/off 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Speed limit information" 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instrument cluster via the computer. Display 4. Select the text message. The following is displayed in the instrument cluster: Messages after trip completion ▷ Current speed limit. Malfunctions indicated during a trip are dis‐ played again after the ignition is switched off. ▷ No speed limit - for the Ger‐ man autobahn. ▷ Speed limit detection is not available. Speed limit detection* The concept Speed limit detection shows the current maxi‐ mum allowable speed in the instrument cluster. The camera at the base of the interior rearview mirror monitors traffic signs at the edge of the road and uses the information from the naviga‐ tion system. In this way, the allowable speed is displayed even in the absence of traffic signs, such as within town limits. Personal judgment Information regarding speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head-up Display, refer to page 126. System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ When signs are concealed by objects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. 84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance ▷ When the windshield is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc., in front of the in‐ terior rearview mirror. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, e.g. due to changes in the road network. Controls ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. Navigation Driving tips Camera The camera is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror. 85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Keep the area in front of the interior rearview mirror clear. Lamps Lamps At a glance Welcome lamps When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in or : the parking and interior position lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐ locked. Activating/deactivating the welcome lamps 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 1 Rear fog lamps* 2 Front fog lamps 3 Automatic headlamp control/adaptive light control*/High-beam Assistant*/welcome lamps 4 Lamps off/daytime running lights* 5 Parking lamps 6 Low beams/welcome lamps 7 Instrument lighting 3. "Welcome light" Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp control Parking lamps : the vehicle lamps light Switch position up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐ riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐ charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 87. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Headlamp courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched off and the headlamp flasher is switched on. Setting the duration 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Pathway light.: s" Low beams Switch position with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up. 86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The low beams always stay on when the fog lamps are switched on. Personal responsibility The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. Switching on For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually un‐ der these conditions.◀ Switching off Daytime running lights* Adaptive light control* The daytime running lights light up in posi‐ and . After the ignition is tion 0, switched off, the parking lamps light up in posi‐ tion . Activating/deactivating 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Daytime running lamps" With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction. The concept Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ rameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road. In tight curves, such as on mountainous roads or when turning, turning lamps that light up the inside area of the curve are switched on at speeds up to approx. 70 km/h, approx. 44 mph. Mobility Controls Activating Switch position on. Navigation A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. Driving tips Controls Switch position : the low beams are switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐ light or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. At a glance Roadside parking lamps Automatic headlamp control Communication Entertainment The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. with the ignition switched 87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 4. Set the duration. Lamps The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the adaptive light control directs light towards the front pas‐ senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is active and illuminates the outside of the curve. Self-leveling headlights The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the light distribution to the contours of the road. The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to avoid blinding oncoming traffic and raised in de‐ pressions to increase visibility. 1. Turn the light switch to or . 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar‐ row. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When the lights are switched on, the high beams are switched on and off automati‐ cally. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐ equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities. Switching the high beams on and off manually Malfunction A message is displayed. Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐ sible. High-beam assistant* ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. The concept ▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2. When the lights are switched on, this system automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐ sistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐ lows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual. Activating the high-beam assistant To reactivate the high-beam assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever. System limits Personal responsibility The high-beam assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐ ually switch off the high beams in situations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀ The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation. ▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings. 88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Adjust the brightness using the thumb wheel. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. Camera Interior lamps General information The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐ cally. The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐ enced by the thumb wheel for the instrument lighting. The camera is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror. Keep the area in front of the interior rearview mirror clear. Fog lamps Front fog lamps* 1 Interior lamps The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on. 2 Reading lamp Press the button. The green indicator lamp lights up. Switching the interior lamps on and off Press the button. If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 87, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lamps. To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Cornering lamp* Reading lamps At a glance To clear this setting: press the button. Mobility switch position, a cornering lamp is In the switched on for a broader light distribution at speeds up to 68 mph/110 km/h. Controls ▷ At low speeds. Driving tips The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. Navigation Adjusting ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐ ence of highly reflective signs. Communication Entertainment Instrument lighting Press the button. Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps. 89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on freeways. Safety Safety Airbags 1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags 3 Head airbags Front airbags Protective action Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐ quate restraint. Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions. Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the body on the side in the chest area. Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head. Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags ▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is triggered. Knee airbag ▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐ jects between an airbag and a person. The knee airbag protects the legs during a fron‐ tal collision. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. 90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system. ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way. ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.◀ The front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐ cordingly. Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.◀ Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions under Children on the front passenger seat.◀ Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐ tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ ing impairment in sensitive individuals. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags Do not touch the individual components imme‐ diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of burns. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explosives. At a glance Controls Driving tips ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered. The system determines whether the front pas‐ senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐ sistance of the human body. Navigation ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐ ets, over the backrests. Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags Communication Entertainment ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags. Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat un‐ less they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below. 91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐ tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐ desired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.◀ Reference ▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation instru‐ ments and mobile phones. Safety Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags corresponding message appears on the Control Display. Calibrating the front seats A corresponding message appears on the Con‐ trol Display. 1. Move the respective seat forward all the way. 2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly. The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐ tivated or deactivated. ▷ The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix‐ ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passen‐ ger side are not activated. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐ tivated. Most child seats are detected by the system, especially the child seats required by the NHTSA at the time the vehicle was manufac‐ tured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ bags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger air‐ bags are not activated. Strength of the driver's and front passenger airbag The strength with which the driver's and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on the position of the driver's and front passenger seats. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears. If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible. Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.◀ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM* The concept Monitoring of the tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. Conditions for operation The system must have been reset when the in‐ flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pres‐ sure and after every tire or wheel change. System limits Sudden tire damage 92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 2. "Vehicle status" Controls 3. "Reset TPM" ▷ For a mounted wheel without TPM electron‐ ics. Driving tips ▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐ tems or devices with the same radio fre‐ quency. Status display A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account. A correction is only necessary if indicated by TPM. Green The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target state. One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire. All wheels are yellow ▷ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires. ▷ The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus warns based on the infla‐ tion pressures initialized last. Gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: ▷ TPM is being reset. ▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency. ▷ Malfunction. 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset". 6. Drive away. The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed. After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐ tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐ setting process is completed automatically dur‐ ing driving. The tires are shown in green and "TPM active" is shown on the Control Display. The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the process resumes auto‐ matically. If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires are displayed in yellow. Low tire pressure message The yellow warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Dis‐ play. In addition, a signal sounds. ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐ flation pressure. ▷ The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus warns based on the infla‐ tion pressures initialized last. Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to below 50 mph/80 km/h. 93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Navigation The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires. At a glance 1. "Vehicle Info" Communication Entertainment The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire: Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Mobility The system does not operate correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐ sures. Resetting the system Reference Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀ Safety Do not continue driving without run-flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.◀ 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM" Continued driving with a flat tire Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: ▷ With a light load: 1 to 2 people without lug‐ gage: approx. 90 miles/150 km. ▷ With a medium load: 2 people, trunk full, or 4 people without luggage: approx. 50 miles/ 80 km. ▷ With a full load: 4 people, trunk full: approx. 30 miles/50 km. Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐ erties.◀ Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐ tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀ Message when not reset The yellow warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Dis‐ play. The system was not reset, e.g., after a wheel change. Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system. Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. The status is displayed. Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. The tires are displayed in gray on the Control Display. No flat tire can be detected. Display in the following situations: ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked. ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if necessary. ▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system automatically becomes active again. Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐ bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐ tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il‐ luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-in‐ flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat 94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐ vance.◀ A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can‐ not be detected. The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: ▷ When the system has not been initialized. ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface. ▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains*. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset" The concept The system detects a pressure loss on the basis of speed differences between the individual wheels while driving. In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐ sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire. Functional requirements 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In‐ itialize the system after each correction of the 5. Start the initialization with "Reset". Communication Entertainment The initialization process adopts the set inflation tire pressures as reference values for the detec‐ tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐ firming the inflation pressures. Mobility Initialization Navigation ▷ When driving with snow chains*. 1. "Vehicle Info" FTM Flat Tire Monitor* At a glance Sudden tire damage Controls System limits Driving tips tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. 95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub‐ stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating prop‐ erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com‐ bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then re‐ main continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐ function indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐ placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Safety The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes. Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp and the vehicle symbol light up. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. Continued driving with a flat tire Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: ▷ With a light load: 1 to 2 people without lug‐ gage: approx. 90 miles/150 km. ▷ With a medium load: 2 people, trunk full, or 4 people without luggage: approx. 50 miles/ 80 km. ▷ With a full load: 4 people, trunk full: approx. 30 miles/50 km. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. If there is minor tire damage, especially on the tire tread, the distance that you can travel with the damaged tire can be extended. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐ ular tires* or run-flat tires*. After notification, inflate the damaged tire to a maximum of 3.5 bar at the next opportunity. Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular sym‐ bol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall. Normal tires* 1. Identify the damaged wheel. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center. 2. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. Run-flat tires* 1. Carefully reduce your speed to a maximum of 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Do not continue driving without runflat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driv‐ ing may result in serious accidents.◀ Do not reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. The ex‐ isting flat tire notification will continue to act as a reminder of the defective tire. The procedure can be repeated several times. Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐ erties.◀ Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐ tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀ Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 2. Repair the puncture. 96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Display The status is displayed. ▷ Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated. The steering wheel begins vibrating gently. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane. Switching on/off If you leave the lane and if a lane line has been detected, the steering wheel begins vibrating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued. End of warning The warning ends: ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ▷ When returning to your own lane. ▷ When braking hard. ▷ When using the turn signal. System limits Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation. Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 40 mph/65 km/h. The state is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.◀ Controls Driving tips This system issues a warning at speeds above approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about to leave the lane on roads with lane lines. Navigation Issued warning The concept Communication Entertainment ▷ Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane line was detected and warnings can be issued. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lines such as in con‐ struction areas. Mobility Lane departure warning* At a glance 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. 97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference ▷ When lane lines are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. Safety ▷ When the lines are covered by objects. Active Blind Spot Detection* ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. The concept ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. Malfunctions Steering wheel vibration Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra‐ tion causes the system to overheat. This causes the lane departure warning to be‐ come deactivated. Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon‐ itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing the button. The system indicates whether there are vehicles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. Camera The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up dimly. Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐ tions described above. The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. Switching on/off The camera is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror. Keep the area in front of the interior rearview mirror clear. Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The state is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. 98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 This causes Active Blind Spot Detection to be‐ come deactivated. Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing the button. At a glance Display Controls Radar sensors The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐ cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind. The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper. System limits ▷ Stickers on the bumper. A message is displayed when the system is not fully functional. For US owners only Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following: In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering wheel, as you may lose control over the vehi‐ cle.◀ FCC ID: The function may be limited in the following sit‐ uations: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. Malfunctions Steering wheel vibration Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra‐ tion causes the system to overheat. ▷ NBG009014A. Compliance statement: Navigation ▷ Dirty or icy bumper. Communication Entertainment The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit‐ ical zone. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐ ence, and ▷ this device must accept any interference re‐ ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. 99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes brightly. Reference Warning Driving tips Information stage Safety Brake force display* The concept ▷ During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up. ▷ During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition. 100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ gine. Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking. Adaptive brake assistant In combination with the Active Cruise Control, this system ensures that the brakes respond even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐ tions. Refer also to Collision warning, refer to page 112. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.◀ Deactivating/activating the DSC OFF program The program can be deactivated/activated via Dynamic Driving Control, refer to page 103. Indicator/warning lamps The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has failed. DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized. The system ensures maximum forward momen‐ tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but driving stability is limited. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ ate caution. The concept You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐ der the following special circumstances: DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes at individual wheels. ▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in deep snow or on loose surfaces. At a glance Controls The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. Driving tips An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver. Navigation ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐ ing. Communication Entertainment Adjust your driving style to the situation ▷ When driving with snow chains. 101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Antilock Brake System ABS Mobility Driving stability control systems Driving stability control systems Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control The system can be deactivated/activated via the TRACTION and SPORT+ programs of the Dy‐ namic Driving Control, refer to page 103. Dynamic Drive* SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐ ers for greater driving agility. NORMAL Balanced tuning between the COMFORT and SPORT programs. COMFORT The concept Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in curves or during quick evasive maneuvers. Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐ creased under all driving conditions. The system utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear axles that react immediately to all driving situa‐ tions. Programs The system offers two different programs. The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐ ing Control, refer to page 103. SPORT Sporty tuning for greater driving agility. NORMAL Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort. Dynamic Damping Control* The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ eling on uneven road surfaces. The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort as required for the road surface and driving style. Programs The system offers three different programs. The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐ ing Control, refer to page 103. Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers for optimal traveling comfort. Integral Active Steering* The concept Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐ tive Steering and rear axle steering. Active Steering varies the steering angle of the wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐ ment as a function of the speed. At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g., in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e., steering becomes more direct. The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐ verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a direction opposite to the front wheels. At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐ ingly reduced. The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as the front wheels. In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can specifically steer the front and rear wheels to stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes, e.g., when braking where road conditions differ on the left and right sides of the vehicle. Initializing In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐ alize the Integral Active Steering. The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. 1. With the engine running, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right several 102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The system offers two different programs. The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐ ing Control, refer to page 103. The concept Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active Steering for greater driving agility. Dynamic Driving Control can be used to adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. Several pro‐ grams are available for this purpose; they can be activated using the two Dynamic Driving Control buttons. NORMAL Operating the programs SPORT Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering for optimal traveling comfort. Press the button Program Malfunction DSC OFF In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle re‐ sponds more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher speed range. SPORT+ TRACTION SPORT NORMAL The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐ activated. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. COMFORT* Have the system checked. For Dynamic Damper Control*, the lower button is labeled with COMFORT. Self-leveling suspension Automatic program change The concept The self-leveling suspension keeps the vehicle height and ground clearance constant. The height of the vehicle at the rear axle is main‐ tained at a predefined level under all load con‐ ditions. At a glance Controls Dynamic Driving Control* Driving tips Programs Navigation Ensure that the rear axle steering is deactivated when using snow chains, refer to page 233. A message appears on the Control Display. A malfunction has occurred in the self-leveling suspension. Vehicle handling may be altered and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced. Visit your nearest service center. Communication Entertainment Using snow chains Malfunction The system automatically switches to NORMAL in the following situations: ▷ Failure of Integral Active Steering*. ▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control*. ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. Mobility 2. Have the system checked if the warning lamp does not go out after moving the steer‐ ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering wheel is at an angle. The system ensures consistent comfort by keeping spring travel constant in all driving sit‐ uations. DSC OFF Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends. 103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference times in a uniform manner until the warning lamp disappears. Driving stability control systems Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering* system are only performed by the rear axle steering. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. Indicator/warning lamps When DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in the tachometer. The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐ namic Traction Control is activated. Activating DSC OFF Press and hold the button, but not lon‐ ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for the DSC lights up in the in‐ strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in the tachometer. SPORT+ Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐ pension during limited driving stabilization. Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. The DSC system is switched off. The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks. Deactivating DSC OFF Activating SPORT+ Press the button. DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp go out. Indicator/warning lamps When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ played in the tachometer. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐ activated. Press the button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the tachometer and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the in‐ strument cluster. Indicator/warning lamps SPORT+ is displayed in the tachometer. The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐ namic Traction Control is activated. TRACTION SPORT Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐ ing stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends. Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for greater driving agility with maximum driving sta‐ bilization. Activating TRACTION Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the tachom‐ eter. The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐ ter lights up. Deactivating TRACTION Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp go out. The program can be configured to individual specifications. The configuration is stored for the remote con‐ trol currently in use. Activating SPORT Press the button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the tachometer. Configuring SPORT When the display is activated on the Control Display, refer to page 105, the sport program can be set to individual specifications. 104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Displays in the instrument cluster Selected program Optionally, the sport program can be configured before it is activated: The selected program is dis‐ played in the tachometer. At a glance After the sport program is activated, select "Configure SPORT mode" on the displayed panel and configure the program. 1. "Settings" Controls 2. "SPORT mode" Pressing the button displays a list of the select‐ able programs. NORMAL For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta‐ bilization. Activating NORMAL Press the button repeatedly until the program display in the tachometer goes out. Display on the Control Display Program changes can be displayed briefly on the Control Display. To do so, make the following settings: 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page 103. COMFORT* Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers for optimal traveling comfort with maximum driving stabilization. Mobility Activating COMFORT Press the button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT appears in the tachometer. 105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference This configuration is retrieved when the sport program is activated. Communication Entertainment 3. Configure the program. Navigation Driving tips Program selection Driving stability control systems 3. "Display driving settings" Drive-off assistant This system supports driving away on gradients. The parking brake is not required. 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐ out delay. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may roll back slightly. Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driving without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐ prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.◀ 106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC* At a glance Driving comfort Buttons at a glance 1 System on/off, interrupt 2 Resume speed For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. 3 Store speed* To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster. 4 Increase distance 5 Store, maintain/change speed 6 Reduce distance If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to accelerate if operated accordingly. Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. Even if some time passes before the vehicle drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐ erated automatically and simply. As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the desired speed. The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐ dients, but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if engine power is insufficient. Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up and the marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used. When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐ namic Stability Control, refer to page 101, is switched on as well, if necessary. Switching off Navigation To the extent possible, the system automatically adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. Communication Entertainment This system can be used to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐ cally on clear roads. Driving tips Controls The concept If the system is deactivated or interrupted, actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Mobility Deactivated or interrupted system 107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference If switching off the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. Driving comfort Press the button. ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed and distance are deleted. Interrupting wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐ ring.◀ Speed differences Great speed differences with vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly ap‐ proaching a truck or when another vehicle swerves into your own lane, cannot be compen‐ sated for by the system.◀ When active, press the button. If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. The system is automatically interrupted if: ▷ The brakes are applied. ▷ Transmission position D is disengaged. ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated. ▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ The safety belt and the driver's door are opened when the vehicle is standing. ▷ The system has not detected objects for an extended period, e.g., on a road with very lit‐ tle traffic without road edge line markings. ▷ The radar sensor is dirty. Maintaining/storing the speed Press the button. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the instrument cluster, refer to page 109. Maintaining, storing or changing the speed The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys‐ tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur‐ rent speed. Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐ Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed in‐ creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ 1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Max. adjustable speed: 110 mph/180 km/h. Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action. Distance Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traffic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.◀ Reduce distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. 108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Calling up the desired speed and distance While driving Press the button with the system switched on. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ When the ignition is switched off. While standing Before leaving the vehicle Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, engage position P of the automatic transmission and apply the parking brake. Oth‐ erwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀ ▷ The vehicle was braked to a halt by the sys‐ tem. When the marking in the speedometer is or‐ ange: The vehicle ahead of you drives away: to ac‐ celerate, press on the accelerator briefly, or press the RES button or the rocker switch. The marking turns green again and your ve‐ hicle follows the vehicle ahead of you. Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean that the vehicle ahead of you has driven off. ▷ You actively braked your vehicle to a halt by pressing on the brake pedal and it is stand‐ ing behind another vehicle: Display of desired speed 2 Distance to vehicle ahead of you 3 Vehicle symbol 4 Brief status display Desired speed Marking in the speedometer ▷ The marking lights up in green: the system is active. ▷ The marking lights up in or‐ ange: the system has been interrupted. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. Brief status display Selected desired speed If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the system requirements for operation are currently not met. Distance to vehicle ahead of you The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown. Press the button to call up a stored desired speed. 2. Release the brake pedal. 109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 1. 1 Driving tips Controls The selected distance, refer to page 109, is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. At a glance Displays in the instrument cluster Navigation Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. Communication Entertainment Increase distance 3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the RES button or the rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away. Mobility The selected distance, refer to page 109, is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. Driving comfort System limits Distance display Distance 1 Speed range Distance 2 Best results are achieved when using the sys‐ tem on well-developed roads and highways. The desired speed can be selected between 20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h. Distance 3 The system can also be activated when station‐ ary. Distance 4 Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa‐ tion when using the system. This value is set after the system is switched on. Detection range The system has been interrupted or distance control is deactivated be‐ cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected. Distance control is deactivated be‐ cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was detected. Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away. Indicator/warning lamps Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lamps do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ The vehicle symbol lights up in orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you. The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for op‐ erating the system. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively assume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator. The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: You are requested to intervene by brak‐ ing or making an evasive maneuver. The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for instance might not be detected. Limited detection capacity Because of the limits to the detection ca‐ pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Deceleration The system does not decelerate when a sta‐ tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of a traffic congestion. The system also does not respond to: ▷ Pedestrians or similarly slow road users. ▷ Red traffic lights. ▷ Stationary objects. ▷ Cross traffic. ▷ Approaching traffic. 110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 A warning may not be issued when ap‐ proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐ stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ you yourself must react, as the system does not react to stopped vehicles. Cornering At a glance No warnings Unexpected lane change When approaching a curve, the system may re‐ act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator pedal is released, the system becomes active again and independently controls the speed. Driving away If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves into your lane from behind a stopped vehicle, In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or be‐ hind bumps in the road. 111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Navigation Communication Entertainment If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi‐ cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Mobility Swerving vehicles In tight curves, situations may result due to the restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be detected at all, or not until after a considerable delay. Reference A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle. If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There‐ fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. Driving tips Controls Swerving vehicles Driving comfort Radar sensor Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Position Collision warning with braking function* The concept The system issues a two-phase warning of a danger of collision at speeds above approx. 10 mph/15 km/h. Radar sensor The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. Dirty or covered sensor It responds to stationary or moving objects that are within the detection range of the radar sys‐ tem. A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec‐ tion of vehicles. ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ move layers of snow and ice carefully ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sen‐ sor. Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example. A message is displayed if the system fails. For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following: FCC ID: ▷ OAYARS3-A Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐ ence, and ▷ this device must accept any interference re‐ ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation. When the vehicle is intentionally brought into contact with an object, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings. Warning stages Prewarning This warning is issued, for example, when there is the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐ tance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed. The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐ vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is accompanied by a braking intervention. The braking intervention is executed with lim‐ ited braking force and for a brief period only. The intervention cannot bring the vehicle to a com‐ plete standstill. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 101, is switched on. Adapting your speed and driving style The acute warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her 112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The display does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Press the button ▷ On: the LED lights up. Detection range The detection capacity of the radar sensor and the collision warning has limitations. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. This may result in the warning not being issued or being issued late. The state is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. For example, the following situations may not be detected: Configuring the prewarning ▷ Slow moving objects when you approach them at high speed. After the warning function is switched on, the following can be set via the iDrive: ▷ The prewarning can be switched on/off. ▷ The time of the prewarning can be set. These settings have no effect on the time of the warning from the Active Cruise Control* that prompts the driver to intervene or brake. Display The collision warning can be issued in the in‐ strument cluster, in the Head-up Display* and acoustically. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of your vehicle. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. ▷ Pedestrians. At a glance Controls Adapting your speed and driving style Driving tips Switching the warning function on/off You are requested to intervene by brak‐ ing or making an evasive maneuver. Navigation The braking function is deactivated if the DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is deactivated. The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning Communication Entertainment When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the collision warning with the braking func‐ tion to prevent accidental interventions. The vehicle lights up in red: prewarning Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves. Mobility The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐ ing the steering wheel. Instrument cluster ▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. 113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference driving speed and style to the traffic condi‐ tions.◀ Driving comfort Prewarning sensitivity If the prewarning setting is too sensitive, there may be an excess of false warnings. Cruise control The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐ gine braking action is insufficient. Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐ ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant speed, for instance: Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel. The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used. When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐ namic Stability Control, refer to page 101, is switched on as well, if necessary. Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or interrupted, actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Press the button. ▷ On curvy roads. ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ If interrupted: press once. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.◀ Interrupting When active, press the button. Controls Buttons at a glance The system is automatically interrupted if: ▷ The brakes are applied. ▷ Transmission position D is disengaged. ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated. ▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. Maintaining/storing the current speed Press the button. 1 System on/off, interrupt 2 Resume speed 3 Store speed* 4 Store, maintain/change speed When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the speedometer, refer to page 115. 114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 1 Display of desired speed 2 Indicator lamp 3 Brief status display Desired speed ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐ ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator. After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the re‐ sistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐ erate more rapidly. The rocker switch can be pressed while inter‐ rupted to maintain and store the current speed. Resuming the desired speed Press the button. The stored speed is reached and maintained. ▷ The marking lights up in or‐ ange: the system has been interrupted. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. Brief status display Brief display in the speedometer: Selected desired speed If --- appears briefly, conditions may not be ad‐ equate to operate the system. PDC Park Distance Control* Navigation ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed in‐ creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ 1 km/h. ▷ The marking lights up in green: the system is active. Communication Entertainment If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. Display in the speedometer: The concept In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the backup camera*, refer to page 120, can be switched on. PDC supports you when parking. Objects that you are approaching slowly in front of* or behind your vehicle are indicated with: ▷ Signal tones. ▷ Visual display. 115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. At a glance Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐ wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐ ring.◀ Controls Adapting the desired speed Driving tips Displays in the instrument cluster Reference Change, maintain speed Driving comfort Measurement False warnings Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors in the bumpers. The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: An acoustic warning is first given: ▷ In heavy rain. ▷ By the front* sensors and two rear corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in ice. ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/ 1.50 m. ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. ▷ On rough road surfaces. ▷ In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages. System limits Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐ tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐ cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range. Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.◀ ▷ In heavy exhaust. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights. Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. Switching off automatically Avoid driving quickly with PDC The system switches off and the LED goes out: Avoid approaching an object quickly. ▷ After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for‐ ward. Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active. For technical reasons, the system may other‐ wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀ Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐ ing forward. Switch on the system again if necessary. Switching on/off manually The detection of objects can reach the physical limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance: ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With low objects. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected. Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. 116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object becomes, the shorter the intervals. ▷ If moving parallel to a wall. 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display. 2. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. The signal tone is switched off: ▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐ ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. ▷ When transmission position P is engaged. Zoom view* On the left part of the display screen, the vehicle is shown enlarged. Volume You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone, refer to page 173. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Dis‐ play before a signal tone sounds. Driving tips ▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that is detected by only one of the corner sen‐ sors. If the backup camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to PDC: ▷ Transmission position D engaged: front area of the vehicle. Navigation The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds: Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the screen mask can also be turned by 90°. Communication Entertainment If objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. ▷ Transmission position R engaged: rear area of the vehicle. Display on the Control Display Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive Mobility If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. Controls At a glance Signal tones 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol. 117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference With PDC activated: Driving comfort 2. Press the controller. Top View* The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐ ting is stored for the remote control currently in use. The concept Malfunction Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the screen mask can also be turned by 90°. Top View assists you in parking and maneuver‐ ing. The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Control Display for this purpose. Capturing the image The image is captured by two cameras inte‐ grated in the exterior mirrors and by the backup camera. The range equals: ▷ approx. 10 ft/3 m to the side. ▷ approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear. A Check Control message, refer to page 83, is displayed in the instrument cluster. On the Control Display, the areas in front of and behind the vehicle are shaded. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. To ensure full operability: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and main‐ tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Surround View* The concept Surround View includes the following systems: ▷ Backup camera, refer to page 120 In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex‐ terior mirrors are detected early. System limits Top View cannot be used in the following situa‐ tions: ▷ With a door open. ▷ With the tailgate open. ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in. ▷ In poor light. A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations. Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the cameras.◀ ▷ Side View, refer to page 122. Switching on automatically ▷ Top View, refer to page 118. Select transmission position R with the engine running. It assists the driver when parking, maneuvering and on blind driveways and intersections. The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive. Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out: ▷ After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for‐ ward. 118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐ ting is stored for the remote control currently in use. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer to page 119. Brightness With Top View switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller. Contrast Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. When the distance to an object is small, a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC display. With Top View switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller. Displaying the turning circle and pathway lines ▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way. ▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space actually needed to the side of the vehicle. The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐ tivated. If the backup camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to Top View: 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display. The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐ rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐ justed with the steering wheel movement. 1. Driving tips "Rear view camera" Select the symbol. 2. Press the controller. Select the symbol. 2. Press the controller. Navigation 1. Controls Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive With Top View switched on: Press the button. At a glance Display on the Control Display Communication Entertainment Switching on/off manually Mobility Switch on the system again if necessary. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed. 2. Press the controller. 119 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference ▷ Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐ ing forward. Driving comfort Cameras ▷ After approx. 9 mph/15 km/h when driving forward. Switch on the system again if necessary. Switching on/off manually The objectives of the Top View cameras are lo‐ cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐ ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 253. Press the button. Backup camera* ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The concept The backup camera provides assistance in park‐ ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be‐ hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer to page 122. Assistance functions System limits Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the backup cam‐ era.◀ Functional requirement ▷ The backup camera is switched on. ▷ The tailgate is fully closed. Pathway lines Detection of objects High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the backup camera.◀ Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The backup camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive. Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out: ▷ After approx. 33 ft/10 m when driving for‐ ward. ▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image when in transmission position R. ▷ Help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads. 120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line. Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 121. At a glance ▷ Are dependent on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐ ing wheel movements. Controls Turning circle lines ▷ Show the course of the smallest possible turning circle on a level road. ▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed when the steering wheel is turned. Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 121. Parking using pathway and turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle lines lead to within the limits of the parking space. ▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in the backup camera image. Their colored steps match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown. Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be active at the same time. Showing the parking aid lines 1. "Parking aid lines" Select the symbol. 2. Press the controller. Communication Entertainment ▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image. Navigation Driving tips Obstacle marking Showing the obstacle marking 1. "Obstacle marking" Select the symbol. 2. Press the controller. Mobility Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed. 121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Spatially-shaped markings are displayed. Driving comfort Display on the Control Display Side View* Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive The concept With PDC activated: 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol. 2. Press the controller. The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐ ting is stored for the remote control currently in use. System limits Brightness With the backup camera switched on: 1. Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected relatively late from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehicle record the traffic situation on each side. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller. Contrast The cameras capture a maximum range of 330 ft/100 m. Display The images from both cameras are shown si‐ multaneously on the Control Display. Check the traffic situation as well With the backup camera switched on: 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re‐ sult from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the Side View cameras.◀ Camera Switching off automatically 1. Select the symbol. System switches off: above approx. 9 mph/ 15 km/h. Switch on the system again if necessary. Switching on/off manually The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 253. Press the button. 122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display. Night Vision with pedestrian detection* The concept At a glance Display on the Control Display 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller. Contrast With the Side View switched on: 1. Heat image Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller. Cameras The image shows the heat radiated by objects in the field of view of the camera. Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects, a dark appearance. The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 253. The ability to detect an object depends on the temperature difference between the object and the background and on the level of heat radiation emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in temperature to the environment or that radiate very little heat are difficult to detect. 123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Driving tips Night Vision cannot replace the driver's personal judgment of the visibility conditions and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the actual visibility conditions must always be the basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted; otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.◀ Navigation With the Side View switched on: Communication Entertainment Personal responsibility Brightness Mobility Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle. The picture is a heat image. The system has an integrated pedestrian detection function that detects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects that are similar in shape to human beings are detected by the system. Reference An infrared camera records the area in front of the vehicle and displays the image on the Con‐ trol Display. Controls Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night vision system. Driving comfort Pedestrian detection ▷ Expanded area 2 to the right and left. The entire area moves along with the vehicle in the direction of the steering angle and changes with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐ creases, the area becomes longer and wider, for example. This symbol is displayed when a person is detected in the central area, arrow 1, immediately in front of the vehicle. Warm objects that are similar in shape to human beings are detected by the system. People detected by the system are displayed with a slight yellow hue. Under good ambient conditions, the pedestrian detection system operates within a range of ap‐ prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m. Warning of people in danger This symbol is displayed when a person detected in the extended area, arrow 2, is moving from the right or left to the central area. The symbols in the Head-up Display* corre‐ spond to the symbols in the Control Display. For people located in the central area, the distance to the person is indicated by the size of the sym‐ bol. Although both the shape and the heat radiation are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out. System limits Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de‐ tection function, even if they are clearly visible in the image. System operation is limited in situations such as the following: If the system detects a person in a defined area in front of the vehicle and if a collision with this person is imminent, a warning symbol appears in the Control Display and Head-up Display*. ▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight curves. ▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective glass is damaged. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ At very high external temperatures. Pedestrian detection Limited pedestrian detection: ▷ When people are fully or partially covered, especially when their heads are covered. ▷ When people are not in an upright position, e.g., when lying down. The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas. ▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., recumbent bicycles). ▷ Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle. 124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The pedestrian detection and warning system only operates in darkness and only when a heat image is displayed. Heat image Adjustments via the iDrive With Night Vision switched on: 1. Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec‐ tion. 2. Press the controller. 3. Open the desired menu item. For safety reasons, when driving at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient light, the image is only displayed when the low beams are switched on. ▷ 1: "Brightness" ▷ 2: "Contrast" ▷ 3: "Pedestrian detection" A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a fraction of a second. Night Vision with pedestrian detection is not available on the rear screen. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. 125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Driving tips Display Navigation This symbol disappears when the function be‐ comes available again. Communication Entertainment Press the button. Environmental influences can limit the availabil‐ ity of pedestrian detection. If pedestrian detec‐ tion is not available, a symbol is displayed in the heat image. Mobility Activation/deactivation Controls At a glance Pedestrian detection Reference ▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g., after an accident. Driving comfort Camera ▷ Wet roads. ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐ tings. Switching on/off Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper‐ ation. The camera is automatically heated when the external temperatures are low. The camera is automatically cleaned together with the headlamps. Press the button. Clean the lens, refer to page 253. Display Head-up Display* The concept This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. In this way, the driver can get information with‐ out averting his or her eyes from the road. Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐ play is influenced by: 1 Lane departure warning* 2 Active Cruise Control* 3 Desired speed 4 Navigation system* 5 Speed The collision warning* or Check Control mes‐ sages are displayed briefly if needed. Selecting displays in the Head-up Display 1. "Settings" ▷ Certain sitting positions. 2. "Head-up display" ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ play. 3. "Displayed information" ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. 126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 A film in the windshield prevents double images from being displayed. Controls Therefore, have the special windshield replaced by a service center only. At a glance 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display. Driving tips The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. Navigation 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller. Communication Entertainment The brightness is adjusted. When the low beams are switched on, the basic setting can be made using the instrument light‐ ing, refer to page 89. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Adjusting the height 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Height" 4. Turn the controller. The height is adjusted. Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. 127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Climate control Climate control Automatic climate control* 1 Air distribution, left side 11 Air distribution, right side 2 Temperature, left side 12 Seat heating*, right side 50 3 AUTO program, left side 13 Active seat ventilation*, right side 51 4 Air volume, AUTO intensity, residual heat, left side 14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ lated-air mode 5 Remove ice and condensation 15 Cooling function 6 Maximum cooling 16 Rear window defroster 7 Display 17 ALL program 8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right side 18 Active seat ventilation*, left side 51 9 AUTO program, right side 19 Seat heating*, left side 50 10 Temperature, right side Climate control functions in detail Manual air distribution Press the button repeatedly to select a program: ▷ Upper body region. ▷ Upper body region and footwell. ▷ Footwell. ▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only. ▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell: driver's side only. If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the conden‐ sation sensor. 128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature. The selected air volume is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. Defrosting windows and removing condensation At a glance Temperature Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐ rected to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function, refer to page 130, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ gram. At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ densation as much as possible. Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted. Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase the intensity. The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. Air volume, manual To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first. Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase air volume. Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐ gion. Open them for this purpose. Air is cooled as quickly as possible: ▷ At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/ 0 ℃. ▷ When the engine is running. The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐ gram is active. Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode: Driving tips The system is set to the lowest tem‐ perature, maximum air volume and recirculatedair mode. Navigation Air volume, air distribution, and tempera‐ ture are controlled automatically. Press the button. Communication Entertainment Press the button. Maximum cooling ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐ trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐ side air and controls the shut-off automati‐ cally. ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ manently blocked. 129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility AUTO program The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐ gram is active. Reference Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ perature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature. Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ moved from the windshield and the front side windows. Controls Press the button. The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant. Climate control If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield. Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated-air mode should not be used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀ Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running. Press the button. Functional requirement ▷ Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been switched off. ▷ Warm engine. ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged. ▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃. Switching on 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Press the right side of the button on the driver's side. is shown on the display of the automatic cli‐ mate control. The air is cooled and dehumidified and – depending on the temperature setting – warmed again. The interior temperature, air volume and air dis‐ tribution can be adjusted with the ignition switched on. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. Switching off The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's side. When using the automatic climate control, con‐ densation water, refer to page 148, develops that exits underneath the vehicle. on the display of the automatic climate control goes out. Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. Switching the system on/off Switching off ▷ Complete system: At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's side. All program Press the button. The current settings on the driver's side for temperature, air volume, air distribution, and AUTO program are transferred to the front pas‐ senger side and to the left and right rear*. The program is switched off if the settings on the front passenger side and in the rear* are changed. Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior. ▷ On the front passenger side: At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the front passenger side. Switching on Press any button. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. 130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ Ventilation for cooling: Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐ rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun. More information can be found in the service re‐ quirements display, refer to page 82. ▷ Draft-free ventilation: Ventilation Ventilation in rear, center Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. At a glance This combined filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance of your vehicle. Adjusting the ventilation Controls The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle. Toward red: warmer. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ row 2. Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ row 2. ▷ Thumb wheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 3. ▷ Thumb wheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 3. Lateral ventilation* Ventilation levels* ▷ Draft-free ventilation: Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level current is fanned out. : the air ▷ Maximum air volume: Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is partially fanned out and partially bundled. This maximizes the air supply. ▷ Direct ventilation: Thumb wheel for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrow. Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is bundled and can be directed to a specific point. 131 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Communication Entertainment Toward blue: colder. Mobility ▷ Thumb wheels* for adjusting the tempera‐ ture, arrows 1. Reference ▷ Thumb wheels* for adjusting the tempera‐ ture, arrows 1. Navigation Driving tips Front ventilation Climate control Rear automatic climate control* At a glance Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted. Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase the intensity. The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. Temperature Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature. 1 Temperature 2 AUTO program 3 Vent settings 4 Air volume, AUTO intensity 5 Display 6 Maximum cooling 7 Seat heating* 53 8 Active seat ventilation* 53 Switching the rear automatic climate control on/off The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ perature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature. Manual air distribution The air distribution can be adjusted to individual needs. 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Rear climate control" The rear automatic climate control is not opera‐ tional if the automatic climate control is switched off or if the function for defrosting or defogging the windows is active. AUTO program Press the button. Air volume, air distribution, and tempera‐ ture are controlled automatically: Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐ rected to the upper body and into the footwell. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. Press the button repeatedly to select a program: ▷ Upper body region. ▷ Upper body region and footwell. ▷ Footwell. Air volume, manual To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first. Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase air volume. The selected air volume is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. 132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 3. "Activate parked-car vent." Switching off At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's side. At a glance Switching the system on/off Maximum cooling Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐ gion. Open them for this purpose. Air is cooled as quickly as possible: ▷ At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/ 0 ℃. ▷ When the engine is running. The system continues to run for some time after being switched off. Preselecting the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Enter the desired time. 5. Press the controller to adopt the setting. Parked-car ventilation Activating the switch-on time The concept 2. "Climate" The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary. 3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2" The system can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset switch-on times. It re‐ mains switched on for 30 minutes. 1. "Settings" The activation time is activated. The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up. They can be operated via iDrive. The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on. Parked-car ventilation The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated. Using the preset switch-on time or when oper‐ ated directly: any external temperature. Navigation The system is set to the lowest tem‐ perature, maximum air volume and recirculatedair mode. The system is switched on. The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes. Communication Entertainment Press the button. Driving tips Press any button. Controls Switching on Open the vents to allow air to flow out. 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Switching on/off directly Interior equipment Interior equipment Integrated universal remote control* Programming The concept This system can replace up to three different hand-held transmitters for various types of re‐ mote-controlled equipment, such as garage doors or lighting systems. The hand-held transmitter signal can be pro‐ grammed on one of the three memory buttons. The corresponding device can then be operated using the programmed memory button. ▷ LED, arrow 1. ▷ Memory buttons, arrow 2. The LED indicates that a signal is being trans‐ mitted. Fixed-code hand-held transmitters When selling the vehicle, delete the stored pro‐ grams for security reasons. 2. Initial setup: During programming During programming and before activat‐ ing a device using the universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or ob‐ jects in the range of movement of the remotecontrolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀ Compatibility 1. Switch on the ignition. Press both outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes. All programs of the three memory buttons, arrow 2, are cleared. 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the mem‐ ory buttons. 4. Simultaneously press the transmit button of the hand-held transmitter and the memory button of the universal remote control. The LED flashes slowly. If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the instructions of the hand-held transmitter, the remote-controlled de‐ vice is generally compatible with the universal remote control. 5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly. If you have any questions, please contact: The device can be operated using the memory button with the engine running or the ignition switched on. ▷ Your service center. ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Malfunction If the device cannot be used after repeated at‐ tempts at programming, please check whether the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an alternating code system. 134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 In this case, program the memory buttons as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters. 1. Switch on the ignition. Alternating-code hand-held transmitters 3. Press the memory button of the universal remote control. Please obtain information on synchronizing the device in the operating manual of the device be‐ ing set up. 4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit button on the hand-held transmitter. Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec‐ ond person. 5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly. 1. Park the vehicle within range of the remotecontrolled device. If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. 3. Press and hold the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approx. 5 sec‐ onds until the device to be adjusted is acti‐ vated. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the mem‐ ory buttons. Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right memory buttons for ap‐ prox. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored programs are deleted. The programs cannot be deleted individually. If the device does not become activated, press and hold the button and watch the LED: ▷ If the LED lights up continuously, the programming is completed. The device should become activated when the but‐ ton is pressed briefly. Mobility ▷ If the LED flashes for approx. 2 seconds and then lights up continuously, con‐ tinue the programming procedure be‐ ginning with step 4. 4. Locate the button on the receiver of the de‐ vice to be set, e.g., on the drive. 135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 2. Program the universal remote control as de‐ scribed above under Fixed-code hand-held transmitters. Reassigning individual programs At a glance The device can be operated when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Controls If the LED flashes rapidly for a brief period and then lights up continuously for approx. 2 sec‐ onds, the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an alternating code system. Driving tips 6. Press the programmed memory button of the universal remote control three times. Navigation ▷ Press the memory button of the universal remote control for an extended period. Communication Entertainment ▷ Read the instructions of the hand-held transmitter. 5. Press the button on the receiver of the de‐ vice to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. To do so: Interior equipment Ashtray/cigarette lighter* Rear Front Opening Opening Press on the cover. Emptying Press on the cover. Take out the insert. Emptying Connecting electrical devices Sockets The lighter socket can be used for electrical de‐ vices up to approx. 200 watts with 12 volts with the engine running or the ignition switched on. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors. Take out the insert. Front center console Lighter Push in the lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out. Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐ trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐ selves.◀ Press on the cover. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*. 136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Installing Navigation 1. Insert the trunk cover into the two front re‐ taining pins. To access the socket: fold open the cover. Trunk 2. Fold down the cover until it engages. Trunk cover Driving tips 2. Push up the cover. The cover can be stowed in the rear compart‐ ment in the trunk, refer to page 143. In the trunk Controls 1. Place your hands into the two recessed grips on the bottom of the cover. Note Do not deposit heavy objects Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on the trunk cover. Otherwise, they could endanger occupants during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers, for example.◀ Communication Entertainment Remove the cover. At a glance Rear center console Through-loading system General information The trunk can be expanded by folding down the trunk partition and the rear seat backrest. 137 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference To load bulky luggage, the cover can be re‐ moved. Mobility Removing Interior equipment The trunk partition and the rear backrest are subdivided at a ratio of 40–20–40. You can also fold down the left and right sides separately. Foldable rear backrests, manual Press the button until the backrest is folded all the way forward. Folding the backrest back Before anyone can be transported in the rear: 1. Put the rear seat backrests into their stand‐ ard position. 2. For the best possible individual seat posi‐ tion, adjust the inclination of the rear seat backrest if necessary. Adjust the standard position of the rear seat backrest Pull the lever. The backrest folds forward. Fold the backrest back; the backrest engages in an upright position. Pull the lever again to adjust the backrest to the desired angle. Locking the backrests Before letting passengers ride in the rear, engage the seat backrests, locking them in place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐ cident due to unexpected seat movement.◀ Foldable rear backrests, powered* Before transporting anyone in the rear and ad‐ justing the individual seat position, adjust the standard position of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, the restraining effect of the seats can be limited in an accident because the backrest position is set too steep.◀ Loading position Press the button. The seat moves for‐ ward and the backrest moves to the ba‐ sic position. Comfortable seating is still possible although knee clearance is reduced. Basic position Press and hold the button until the seat stops automatically in its basic position. Operation of the rear backrest was deactivated After a brief period, operation of the rear back‐ rest is deactivated to save battery power. 1 Fold backrest forward To reactivate operation: 2 Loading position ▷ Open or close a door or the tailgate. 3 Basic position ▷ Press a button on the remote control. Fold backrest forward Move the front seats to an upright position Before folding down the rear backrests, ensure that the front seats are moved forward slightly and are in an upright position. Other‐ wise, the head restraint and screen could be damaged.◀ ▷ Press the Start/Stop button. Folding down the trunk partition 1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance 2. To release the cargo cover, pull both levers in the trunk. The cargo cover folds into an upright position and rests against the rear backrest. Unlocking the middle trunk partition Repositioning Fold back the cargo cover and snap into place Driving tips Controls 2. To release the trunk partition, pull the cor‐ responding lever in the trunk. The trunk par‐ tition folds forward. The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a protective jacket in the trunk. Closing the trunk partition Follow the installation and operation instruc‐ tions included in the protective jacket. Folding back and engaging the trunk partition. Danger of pinching Make sure that the path of the cargo cover is clear when folding it back up; otherwise, inju‐ ries may result.◀ Ensure that the lock is securely engaged Mobility When folding back the backrest, be sure that it locks in place securely. If it is not properly engaged, transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or eva‐ sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu‐ pants.◀ Loading position To expand the trunk, the cargo cover can be moved into a vertical position. 1. Move the rear backrest to the loading posi‐ tion, refer to page 138. 139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Press the opener toward the left. Communication Entertainment General information Navigation Ski and snowboard bag* Storage compartments Storage compartments Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail‐ able in the vehicle interior: ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's and front passenger side, refer to page 140. ▷ Storage compartment in the center console, refer to page 142. Close the glove compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents.◀ Closing Fold up the cover. USB interface for data transfer ▷ Storage compartment in the center armrest, refer to page 141, in the front and rear. ▷ Compartments in the doors. ▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats*. ▷ Net in the front passenger footwell. No loose objects in the passenger com‐ partment Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐ partment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants for in‐ stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐ vers.◀ Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: ▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 33. ▷ Music collection, refer to page 187. Observe the following when connecting: Glove compartment ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ nector into the USB interface. Front passenger side ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface. Opening ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. ▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices. Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on. Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately 140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Pull the handle. Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately Close the glove compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents.◀ Closing After the storage compartment is locked, the re‐ mote control can be handed out without the in‐ tegrated key, refer to page 32, for instance at a hotel. This prevents access to the storage compart‐ ment and to the trunk. Connection for an external audio device Fold up the cover. Center armrest Front A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats. Opening This can be used to connect an external audio device, such as a CD or MP3 player. ▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 192. ▷ USB audio interface*, refer to page 193. At a glance Controls Driving tips The storage compartment in the armrest can be locked with a key to separately secure the tail‐ gate, refer to page 41, for example. Navigation Opening Communication Entertainment Locking the storage compartment Driver's side 141 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Press the buttons next to the lock. A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats. Mobility Rear Storage compartments Folding down Front Pull on the opener and fold the armrest forward. To open: press on the cover. Opening Rear Storage compartment in the rear center arm‐ rest. In the front center armrest. Storage compartment in the center console To open: press the button. Clothes hooks To open: press the button. Cupholders The clothes hooks are located next to the grab handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear. Do not obstruct view Notes Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ Unsuitable containers When suspending clothing from the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's vision.◀ No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐ sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers.◀ Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐ ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐ age.◀ 142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Retaining straps on the left* and right side trim for fastening small objects. Multi-function hook There are two multi-function hooks on the trunk walls. 1. Open the holder by pressing on the button. You can fix the cover in an upright position, if needed. To do so, unhook the right-hand retain‐ ing strap and hook it into the rear of the cover. Do not stow heavy objects Only stow light objects in the rear com‐ partment; otherwise, damage may occur.◀ At a glance To close the cover, press downward until it locks. Controls Retaining straps To open the cover, pull upward on the handle, arrow 1. Front compartment To open, reach into the recess and raise the handle, arrow 2. The cover can be completely removed. Navigation Lashing eyes Driving tips Storage compartments in the trunk 2. Press the bag handle into the holder from above. Only hang light bags or suitable objects from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured.◀ To secure cargo, refer to page 149, with nets or draw straps, the trunk is fitted with lashing eyes. Mobility Storage compartments in the floor Communication Entertainment Light and suitable objects only The trunk cover, refer to page 137, can be stowed in the rear compartment. 143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Rear compartment 144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Driving tips This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes. 145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Breaking-in period above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life. General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. General driving notes The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy. Closing the tailgate Engine and differential Only operate the vehicle with the tailgate closed; otherwise, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment.◀ Always obey the official speed limit. Up to approx. 1,200 miles/2,000 km Drive at varying engine and road speeds but do not exceed: Drive with the tailgate closed If the vehicle must be driven with the tailgate open: 1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof*. ▷ In gasoline engines, 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/ 160 km/h. 2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto‐ matic climate control system. Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode for the initial miles. Hot exhaust system From 1,200 miles/2,000 km High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased. Hot exhaust system Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐ tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐ riod. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. When driv‐ ing, standing at idle and while parking, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot ex‐ haust system and any highly flammable materi‐ als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal injury as well as property damage. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/ 300 km. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.◀ Tires Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐ prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive conservatively during this breaking-in period. Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐ served if any of the components mentioned 146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Use this area for garage door openers, devices for electronic toll collection, etc. Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec‐ trical systems and the transmission may be damaged.◀ Braking safely Climate control laminated tinted safety glass Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. The vehicle glass provides full protection against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the skin. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces‐ sary. Mobile communication devices in the vehicle The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ hicle It is advised that you do not use mobile commu‐ nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the vehicle without connecting them directly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐ tronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation generated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior.◀ Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode. Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. Hydroplaning The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle. Hydroplaning Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, resulting in a reduction in the brake system efficiency. 147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Controls The marked area is not covered with a heat-re‐ flective coating. Driving tips Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐ tions Navigation Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h. Communication Entertainment Driving through water Mobility When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀ Reference Climate control windshield Things to remember when driving You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down in the manual mode of the auto‐ matic transmission, refer to page 72. Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐ sibly even brake failure.◀ Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable with the engine stopped.◀ To avoid exceeding the approved carrying ca‐ pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐ creases the rate at which damage develops in‐ side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ No fluids in the trunk Make sure that fluids do not leak into the trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ aged.◀ Determining the load limit No objects in the area around the pedals Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area of pedal movement and impair pedal operation.◀ Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are furthered by: ▷ Low mileage. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐ fect that generally cannot be corrected. Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, con‐ densation water develops that exits underneath the vehicle. Therefore, traces of condensed water under the vehicle are normal. Loading Overloading the vehicle 1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐ hicle’s placard*: ▷ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐ hicle and unstable driving situations may result. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐ sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐ able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs: 1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs. 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available 148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps*. Cargo straps can be attached to four lashing eyes located in the trunk. Securing cargo The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported. Stowing cargo Always position and secure the cargo as described above; otherwise, it can endanger the car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐ den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐ pants.◀ Roof-mounted luggage rack Special rack system as optional accessory ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low as possible, ideally directly behind the trunk partition. A special rack system is available as an optional accessory. Follow the directions given in the installation in‐ structions. Mobility ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners. ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests, including the trunk partition, to stow cargo. 149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Driving tips ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ taining straps, a trunk net* or draw straps. Navigation Load Communication Entertainment 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transfered to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load ca‐ pacity of your vehicle. Controls At a glance Securing cargo Reference cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. Things to remember when driving Anchorage points Saving fuel General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ ferent factors. Fold the cover outward. Mounting Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising and opening the glass sunroof*. The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ ing style and regular maintenance, refer to page 238, can have an influence on fuel con‐ sumption and on the environmental impact. Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Magnetic roof-mounted luggage rack Remove attached parts following use Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roofmounted luggage racks cannot be mounted. Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use. Loading Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight, refer to page 258. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. ▷ The roof load should not be too large in area. ▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐ tom. Close the windows and glass sunroof* Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption. Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation pressure, refer to page 227, at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. ▷ Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear. ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate. Drive away without delay ▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐ tly. Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature. 150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption. Controls Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. Driving tips On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac‐ celerator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. Switch off the engine during longer stops Navigation Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. Fuel savings are achieved after the vehicle is switched off for only approx. 4 seconds. Communication Entertainment Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐ dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐ sume additional fuel, especially in city and stopand-go traffic. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed. Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐ ice center. 151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐ tem, refer to page 238. 152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Navigation This chapter contains various examples of how the navigation system can guide you reliably to your destination. 153 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Navigation Navigation Navigation system 3. "Enter address" General information The navigation system can determine the pre‐ cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐ ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide you to every entered destination. Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated. Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐ tionary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐ tion between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.◀ 4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed state/province. Entering a town/city 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐ played town/city. Destination input Manual destination entry General information The system supports you in entering street names and house numbers by automatically completing the entry and providing entry com‐ parisons, refer to page 24. Stored town/city and street names can be called up quickly. ▷ If the existing entries should not be changed, the entries for the state/province and town/ city can be skipped. ▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/ city center if no street is entered. Entering a state/province 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select letters, if necessary. The list is narrowed down further with each entry. 3. Move the controller to the right. 4. Select the town/city name from the list. If there are several towns/cities with the same name: 1. Change to the list of town/city names. 2. Highlight the town/city. With the Professional navigation system: A preview map is displayed on the split screen. 3. Select the town/city. 2. "Navigation" 154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 1. "Navigation" 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐ played town/city. 2. "Enter address" Select the symbol. 3. Select the numbers. 4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/ cities. 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 4. Change to the list of street names. 5. "In" the displayed state/province. Controls 2. At a glance Entering the postal code 5. Highlight the postal code. With the Professional navigation system: A preview map is displayed on the split screen. 2. Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town/city. 6. Select the letters. If there are several streets with the same name: 8. Highlight the street. With the Professional navigation system: A preview map is displayed on the split screen. 3. Select the street. Alternative: enter the street address and house number 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter the street as you would the town/city. 3. "House number" 4. Select the numbers. 5. Change to the list of house numbers. 6. Select a house number or range of house numbers. Entering a street without a destination town/city All streets of the selected state/province are of‐ fered. The associated town/city is displayed af‐ ter the street name. The desired street does not exist in the specified city/town because it belongs to another part of the city/town. 9. Select the street. Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1. "Accept destination" 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest." ▷ Adjusting "Route preference", refer to page 162. ▷ Searching "Points of Interest at loc.", refer to page 157. Address book Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book": contacts with addresses are displayed if these have been checked as destinations. If the mobile phone* does not display the contacts with addresses, they must first be 155 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility 2. Highlight the street. With the Professional navigation system: A preview map is displayed on the split screen. Reference 1. Change to the list of street names. 7. Change to the list of street names. Navigation 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. Communication Entertainment Entering a street and intersection Driving tips 6. Select the postal code. Navigation checked as a destination, refer to page 214. 3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with "A-Z search". 4. If necessary, select "Business address" or "Home address". Storing the destination in the address book 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position to contact" 4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐ isting contact from the list. Select the type of address and enter the first and last name. 5. "Store in vehicle" Editing or deleting an address After entering the destination, store the desti‐ nation in the address book. 1. "Navigation" 1. Open "Options". 3. Highlight the entry. 2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact" 4. Open "Options". 2. "Address book" 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry" Using the home address as the destination The home address must be stored. Specify the home address, refer to page 213. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. "Home" 3. Select an existing contact, if available. 4. Select "Business address" or "Home address". 5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First name". 6. "Store in vehicle" Storing the position The current position can be stored in the ad‐ dress book. 4. Start destination guidance. 1. "Navigation" 156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Special destinations At a glance Opening the search for special destinations The destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance. Calling up the last destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" To select special destinations, e.g., hotels or tourist attractions: 1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of Interest" Narrow the search for special destinations by specifying the location and category. Controls The destinations previously entered are stored automatically. At a glance Last destinations 3. Select the destination. 4. Start destination guidance. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit destination" Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation" 2. Select the location where the system is to search for the special destination: "At current location", "At destination", "At a different destination", "Along route" Special destinations category 1. "Category" 2. Select "All" or the specific category of the special destination, e.g., hotels or restau‐ rants. 2. "Last destinations" Category details 3. Highlight the destination. For some special destinations, additional details can be displayed that are available in the navi‐ gation data, e.g., an Italian-style restaurant. 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destinations" "Category details" Mobility 4. Open "Options". 157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Editing the destination Communication Entertainment 1. "Search area" Navigation Driving tips Position of special destinations Navigation 4. "BMW Assist dest. entry" Entering the special destination by its name 1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of Interest" 3. "Name, A-Z search" 4. Select the letters. Depending on the distance, the search may take some time. The list can contain a max‐ imum of 100 entries. Starting the search for special destinations 1. "Start search" 5. Change to the list of special destinations. A list of the special destinations is displayed. 6. Highlight the special destination. ▷ "At current location" The special destinations are listed ac‐ cording to their distance from the cur‐ rent location and are displayed with a di‐ rectional arrow pointing to the destination. ▷ "At destination", "At a different destination" and "Along route" Special destinations are sorted by the distance to the search point. ▷ Destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map view as sym‐ bols. The display depends on the scale of the map and the category. 2. Highlight the special destination. With the Professional navigation system: A preview map is displayed on the split screen. With the Professional navigation system: A preview map is displayed on the split screen. 7. Select a special destination. 8. Select the symbol. 9. "Start guidance" Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map view: 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display Points of Interest" 3. Select a special destination. 4. Select the symbol. 5. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest." If a phone number is available, a connection can be established if necessary. Destination entry via BMW Assist* A connection is established to the Concierge service, refer to page 217. 1. "Navigation" 5. Select the setting. Destination via map 2. "Enter address" Opening the map 3. Open "Options". 1. "Navigation" 158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance 2. "Map" The map section is displayed. The map shows the current position of the vehicle. Selecting the destination 1. Select the symbol. ▷ To change the scale: turn the controller. ▷ ▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction. ▷ "Exit interactive map" ▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the controller in the required direction and turn it. Select the symbol. Start destination guidance to the location marked on the map. ▷ "View in northern direction" ▷ "Display destination": the map section around the destination is displayed. ▷ "Display current location": the map section around your current location is displayed. Driving tips 2. Select the destination with crosshairs. Controls "Interactive map" is started. ▷ Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest." ▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map view. ▷ "Find points of interest": the search for special destinations is started. Specifying the street If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis‐ plays a street name in the vicinity or the coordi‐ nates of the destination. Interactive map In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted and the visible map section can be shifted. In addition, pressing the controller makes further functions available: ▷ When entering the destination by voice, you can change between voice operation and the iDrive. ▷ To have the available spoken instructions read aloud ›Voice commands‹ Saying the entries ▷ Example: to enter a town/city in Germany as a whole word, the language of the system must be German. ▷ The town/city, street, and house number can be said as a single sentence. ▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in‐ tersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the language of the system, refer to page 81. ▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and the language of the system differ. ▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐ gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters. 159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Communication Entertainment 3. Press the controller to display additional menu items. ▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐ fer to page 25. Mobility General information Reference Destination entry by voice* Navigation ▷ "Find points of interest" Navigation Entering the address Starting destination guidance 1. ›Start guidance‹ or, if necessary, Enter new destination‹ Briefly press the button on the steering wheel. 2. ›Enter address‹ Storing a destination 3. Wait for a request from the system. The destination is automatically added to the list of last destinations. 4. Specify the desired address in the sug‐ gested form. 5. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system. 6. If necessary, individually name the separate components of the address, e.g., the town/ city. Planning a trip New trip Additional intermediate destinations can be en‐ tered for a trip. 1. "Navigation" Entering a town/city 2. "Map" The town/city can either be said as a word or spelled. 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Enter new destination" 1. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹. 2. Wait for the system to prompt you for the town/city. 3. Say the name of the town/city, or name at least the first three letters. Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit‐ ies may be suggested. 4. Select the town/city. ▷ To select a recommended town/ city: ›Yes‹ ▷ To select a different town/city: ›New entry‹ 5. Select the type of destination entry and en‐ ter the intermediate destination. ▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ... ‹ e.g., entry 2 ▷ To spell an entry: ›Spell city‹ Entering a street or intersection Enter a street or intersection in the same way as you would enter a town/city. Entering a house number House numbers can be entered up to the num‐ ber 999 999. Entering intermediate destinations ›House number‹ A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for one trip. Say each digit separately. 1. "Enter new destination" 160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ "Delete dest. in the trip" At a glance ▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an intermediate destination to another po‐ sition in the list. 2. Select the type of destination entry and en‐ ter the intermediate destination. 1. "Stored trips" 2. Highlight the desired trip. 3. Open "Options". After all intermediate destinations have been entered, "Start guidance". Or select a trip that has already been stored, if available. "Stored trips" 1. "Navigation" 2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 154. 3. "Accept destination" 4. "Start guidance" With the Professional navigation system: Storing a trip Up to 30 created trips can be stored in the trip list. 1. Open "Options". 2. "Store trip" 3. Enter the letters. 4. "OK" ▷ The route is shown on the Control Display. ▷ The distance to the destination/intermedi‐ ate destination and the estimated time of ar‐ rival are displayed in the map view. ▷ The arrow display is shown in the instrument panel and on the Control Display if neces‐ sary. Terminating destination guidance 1. "Navigation" Trip direction The trip direction is reversed: intermediate des‐ tinations are displayed in reverse order in the list. 2. "Map" 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Stop guidance" 1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" Continuing destination guidance 3. "Options" If the destination was not reached during the last trip, destination guidance can be resumed. 4. "Reverse order of trip dest." Intermediate destination options "Resume guidance" Driving tips Starting destination guidance Navigation Starting the trip Destination guidance Communication Entertainment 4. Select the location where the intermediate destination is to be inserted: "Reposition dest. in the trip" 4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip" Mobility 3. Select "Add as another dest.". Controls With the Professional navigation system: Deleting a trip 2. Select an intermediate destination. 161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 1. "Destination in the trip" Navigation Route criteria ▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided wherever possible. General information ▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided where possible. ▷ The route calculated can be influenced by selecting certain criteria. ▷ The route criteria can be changed when the destination is entered and during destina‐ tion guidance. Dynamic destination guidance ▷ Road types are part of the navigation data and are taken into consideration when plan‐ ning a route, e.g., avoid highways. ▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐ structions along the original route. ▷ The recommended route may differ from the route you would take based on personal ex‐ perience. The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions. ▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on the map. ▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐ trol currently in use. ▷ Depending on the type of road and the na‐ ture and length of the traffic obstruction, the route can also be calculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction. Changing the route criteria Activating dynamic destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Route preference" 3. "Dynamic guidance" 4. Select the criterion: ▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route, be‐ ing a combination of the shortest possi‐ ble route and the fastest roads. Route Different views of the route are available during destination guidance: ▷ "Efficient route": optimized combina‐ tion of the fastest and shortest route. ▷ Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display. ▷ "Short route": short distance, irrespec‐ tive of how fast or slow progress will be. ▷ List of streets and towns/cities. ▷ "Alternative routes": other suggested alternative routes. ▷ Arrow display on the Head‐Up Display*, re‐ fer to page 126. ▷ Map view, refer to page 164. Arrow view The following information is displayed during destination guidance: ▷ Large arrow, current direction of travel. ▷ Small arrow, indicator of next change in di‐ rection. ▷ Intersection view. 5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if necessary: ▷ "Avoid highways": highways are avoided wherever possible. ▷ Lane information. ▷ Traffic bulletins. ▷ Distance to next change in direction. ▷ Street name at next change in direction. 162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 With the Professional navigation system: The position of the gas station is shown on the split screen. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 5. Select the gas station. 3. Highlight a section. 6. Calculate a new route for a route section. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for:" Switching spoken instructions on/off The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Select the symbol. Symbol Meaning Spoken instructions are switched on Spoken instructions are switched off Repeating spoken instructions 4. Turn the controller. Enter the desired num‐ ber of miles. 5. Press the controller. Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be by‐ passed: 1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "Remove blocking" Gas station recommendation The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐ tions along the route are recommended. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Highlight the symbol. 4. Press the controller twice. Volume of spoken instructions Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐ tion until the desired volume is set. Saving the spoken instructions on the programmable memory buttons The function for switching the spoken instruc‐ tions on/off can be stored on a programmable memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac‐ cess. 1. "Navigation" 163 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Navigation Bypassing a section of the route Select the symbol. 7. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest." Communication Entertainment With the Professional navigation system: The route section is displayed on the split screen. At a glance 4. Highlight a gas station. Controls A list of the gas stations is displayed. Driving tips 3. "Recommended refuel" Mobility When destination guidance is started, a list of the streets and towns/cities on the route is dis‐ played. The driving distances and traffic bulle‐ tins are displayed for each route section. 2. "Route information" Reference Displaying a list of streets or towns/ cities on the route Navigation Map view Automatically scaled map scale Selecting the map view Your location is indicated on the map. After destination guidance is started, the plan‐ ned route is displayed on the map. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Settings for the map view The map is shown on the Control Display. 1. Open "Options". 1. "Navigation" 2. "Settings" 2. "Map" The following functions are directly available in the map view: Symbol In the map view facing north, turn the controller in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐ played. The map shows the entire range from your location to the destination. Function Starting/ending destination guidance Switching spoken instructions on/off Changing the route criteria Searching for special destina‐ tions Displaying traffic bulletins Interactive map Map view settings Changing the scale Press the controller to show/suppress addi‐ tional information on the map. Changing the map section Open the interactive map. Set the optimized map view. ▷ "Day/night mode" Select and create the necessary settings depending on the light conditions. When the traffic situation/gray card is activated, this setting is not taken into account. ▷ With the Professional navigation system: "Satellite images" Depending on availability and resolution, satellite images* are displayed at scales of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to 1,000 km. ▷ With the Professional navigation system: "Perspective view in 3D" Displays a spatial view. Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are dis‐ played on the map in 3D. ▷ "Traffic situation/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins. Symbols for the special destina‐ tions are no longer displayed. With the Professional navigation system: Map view for split screen ▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction. The map view can be selected for the split screen independently from the main screen. ▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐ troller in the required direction and turn it. 1. Open "Options". Changing the scale 1. Select the symbol. 2. To change the scale: turn the controller. 2. "Split screen" The split screen is switched on. 3. Tilt the controller to the right until the split screen contents are selected. 4. Select the map view. 164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐ tions that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Mes‐ sage Channel) of a traffic information serv‐ ice. Information on traffic obstructions and hazards is updated continuously. Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐ gation have the capability to display realtime traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply: An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein. A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐ cident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to re‐ produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic in‐ cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of North America, LLC. (“BMW NA”) and Total Traffic Net‐ work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in‐ cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith. B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐ mational only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect, special, consequential, exemplary, or inci‐ dental damages (including, without limita‐ tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net‐ work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limita‐ tions apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict li‐ ability). Some states do not allow the exclu‐ sion or limitation of incidental or consequen‐ tial damages, so those particular limitations may not apply to you. ▷ The traffic information is displayed in the map. At a glance Controls At a glance Driving tips Traffic bulletins* C. The licensed material is provided to li‐ censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total Traffic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the li‐ censed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the li‐ censed material (including, without limita‐ tion, that the licensed material will be errorfree, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), express, im‐ plied or statutory, including, without limita‐ tion, the implied warranties of merchanta‐ bility, non-infringement fitness for a particular purpose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade. Navigation 5. To change the scale: change to the split screen and turn the controller. Communication Entertainment ▷ "Map view with perspective" Switching the reception on/off 1. "Navigation" Mobility ▷ "Map direction of travel" suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Receive Traffic Info" Opening the traffic bulletins 1. "Navigation" 165 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference ▷ "Map facing north" Navigation 3. Open "Options". 2. "Map" Move the controller to the left. Select the symbol. 4. "Traffic Info categories" 5. Set the filter. 3. "Traffic Info" First, the traffic bulletins on the planned route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle posi‐ tion. 4. Select a traffic bulletin. Select the symbol to obtain additional information. Traffic bulletins in the map When the traffic situation/gray card is activated, the view on the Control Display is switched over to shades of gray. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is dis‐ regarded in this setting. Symbols and special destinations are not displayed. 1. "Navigation" Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis‐ played in the map. ▷ Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route are always displayed. ▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no‐ tify you of potentially dangerous situations, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid‐ den. 2. "Map" Traffic bulletins during destination guidance 3. Open "Options". ▷ "Dynamic guidance", refer to page 162 4. "Settings" 5. "Traffic situation/gray map" Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐ cation of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐ played. Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐ tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed in the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route. Filtering of traffic bulletins Set which traffic bulletins are to be displayed in the map. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" This feature influences the behavior of the system. ▷ During destination guidance, obstructions on the route are taken into consideration. ▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐ less of the setting. Traffic obstructions The system calculates the optimized route, tak‐ ing into consideration traffic obstructions and road types. Selecting a detour Set whether traffic obstructions should be taken into consideration during route planning. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Traffic Info" 3. Select a traffic obstruction that you wish to bypass. 4. "Recomm. detour" 166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 "Dynamic guidance" is activated automati‐ cally. Navigation data Information on navigation data 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". What to do if... ▷ The current transmission position cannot be displayed? The vehicle is located in an unrecognized region, is in a poor reception area, or the system is currently determining the posi‐ tion. Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. ▷ The destination without street information is not used for route guidance? 3. "Navigation system version" information is displayed on the data version. When city has been input, no downtown can be determined. Updating the navigation data Input any street in the selected city and start destination guidance. General information Navigation data and authorization codes are available from your service center. Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be up‐ dated. ▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐ date may take several hours. ▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐ ance? The destination data is not contained in the navigation data. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original. ▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐ lected? ▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery. The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. ▷ The basic navigation is available during the trip. Select a goal that is as close as possible to the original. ▷ The status of the update can be queried in the options menu. ▷ The map view is shown in shades of gray? ▷ The system restarts after the update. ▷ The data carrier with the navigation data can be removed after the update is complete. Professional navigation system: Perform the update 1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD player with the labeled side facing up. When the traffic situation/gray card is acti‐ vated, the view on the Control Display is switched over to shades of gray. This ena‐ bles a better view of the traffic bulletins. ▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output during route guidance in front of intersec‐ tions? The area has not yet been fully recorded, or you have left the recommended route and 167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Controls 4. Select "Recomm. detour", if necessary. After an interruption of the trip, follow the in‐ structions on the Control Display. Driving tips 3. First, the traffic bulletins on the planned route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle position. Navigation 3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐ tion DVD and change the DVD if needed. 2. "Traffic Info" Communication Entertainment 1. "Navigation" Mobility 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. Reference Taking traffic obstructions into consideration Navigation the system requires a few seconds to cal‐ culate a new route suggestion. 168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 169 Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance 170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Entertainment The chapter helps assure your enjoyment when receiving radio and television stations and playing CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection. 171 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Tone Tone General information The sound settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Adjusting the equalizer 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Equalizer" Treble, bass, balance, and fader 4. Select the desired setting. ▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution. ▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution. Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller. Multi-channel playback, surround* Choose between stereo and multi-channel play‐ back, surround. 3. Select the desired tone settings. Setting multi-channel playback, surround 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Surround" 4. To adjust: turn the controller. 5. To confirm: press the controller. Equalizer* Setting for individual audio frequency ranges. Multi-channel playback, surround, is simulated when playing back an audio track in stereo. 172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Multi-channel playback is automatically acti‐ vated or deactivated, depending on the audio track selected. Volume Controls ▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume control. ▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared to the entertainment sound output. Driving tips ▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐ tertainment sound output. Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" Communication Entertainment Navigation 4. Select the desired volume setting. 5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller. Resetting the tone settings 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility 3. "Reset" Radio Radio Controls Storing a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Highlight the desired station. 1 Change entertainment sources 2 Change station/track 3 Programmable memory buttons 4 Volume, on/off 4. Press the controller for an extended period. 5 Change wave band 5. Select the desired memory location. AM/FM station Selecting a station The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use. The stations can also be stored on the program‐ mable memory buttons, refer to page 23. 1. "Radio" Selecting a station manually 2. "FM" or "AM" Station selection via the frequency. 3. Select the desired station. 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. "Manual" 4. To select the frequency: turn the controller. All saved stations are stored for the remote con‐ trol currently in use. Changing the station via the button Press the button. To store the station: press the controller for an extended period. 174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Displaying additional information 1. "Radio" Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the ar‐ tist. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Station info" Selecting a substation This symbol indicates that a main station also broadcasts additional substations. The station name of the main station ends in HD1. Station names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc. 1. Select the desired station. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. 2. Press the controller. HD Radio™ reception* When reception is poor, the substation is muted for several seconds. If reception is interrupted for an extended period, it switches back to the main station. Many stations broadcast both analog and digital signals. License conditions HD Radio™ technology manufactured under li‐ cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For‐ eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq‐ uity Digital Corp. Activating/deactivating digital radio reception Driving tips 1. Select the desired station. Navigation 4. "RDS" 3. Select the substation. Weather Band* General information The availability of the Weather Band and the number of available channels can vary depend‐ ing on the region. 1. "Radio" Switching on the Weather Band 2. "FM" or "AM" 1. "Radio" 3. Open "Options". 2. "Weather band" 4. "HD Radio Reception" 3. Select the desired channel. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Additional information This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital. Weather Band is a service of the National Oce‐ anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA). 175 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Communication Entertainment 3. Open "Options". Mobility 2. "FM" At a glance Switching the RDS on/off Controls RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM wave band. When playing a station with multiple frequencies, the system automatically switches to the frequency with the best reception, if needed. In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. Due to time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe‐ titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off digital radio reception. Reference RDS* Radio Additional information on the Internet: www.nws.noaa.gov. 3. "Category" Satellite radio* General information The channels are offered in predefined pack‐ ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐ phone. Navigation bar overview Symbol Function Change the list view. Select the category. Direct channel entry 4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐ gory. 5. Select the desired channel. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed. 6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐ nel enabled. Timeshift Open the My Favorites category/ open a favorite. Manage the favorites. Traffic Jump The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 23. Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line. You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number. Unsubscribing from channels 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Manage subscription" Enabling channels The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels. 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐ nels. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Press the controller again to confirm the highlighted channel. At a glance 5. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed. Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels. Controls The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use. Via the iDrive 7. Select the desired memory location. 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐ gory. The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use. 4. Select the desired channel. The channels can also be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23. Changing the list view The list view changes every time the first symbol on the navigation bar is pressed. Information on the channel is displayed. Meaning Channel name Artist Via the buttons on the center console Track Press the button. Selecting a category Via direct channel entry 1. "Radio" 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. 3. 4. Select the desired category. 4. Turn the controller until the desired channel is reached and press the controller. Storing a channel 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐ sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. "Category" Timeshift Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐ cast on the channel currently being listened to is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must be available. The stored audio track can be played with a de‐ lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf‐ fer is cleared when a new channel is selected. 177 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility "Select channel" Reference The next channel is selected. Communication Entertainment Symbol Navigation 2. "Satellite radio" Driving tips 1. "Radio" Radio Opening the timeshift function 1. "Radio" 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift" 3. 4. "Automatic time shift" "Replay - Time shift" To deactivate: "Automatic time shift". Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, league, and team. Storing the artist, track, or game ▷ The red arrow shows the current playback position. It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐ rently being broadcast. The channel information must be available. ▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar. 1. "Radio" For live transmissions: "live". Timeshift menu 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐ sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. Symbol Function 5. Press the controller again. Go to the live broadcast 6. Select the artist, track, or game. Playback/pause Storing the league or team Next track Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites from a selection list. Previous track Fast forward Reverse 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac‐ tivated "Manage favorites" 4. "Add sports information" Automatic timeshift When the function is activated, audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of: ▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls. ▷ Activation of the voice activation system. ▷ Muting. The audio playback then continues with a time delay. To activate: 5. Select the league. 6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team. 178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Selecting a region If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐ lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐ onds: "Favorite alert!". 1. "Radio" Select the symbol while the message is shown. 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Set jump" 5. Select the desired region. The region is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Activating/deactivating the jump Controls "Favorites" At a glance Opening the favorites 2. "Satellite radio" 3. A new panel opens. Information will be broadcast shortly. Activating/deactivating the favorites Information is currently being broad‐ cast. Favorites can be activated and deactivated globally and individually. 1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐ ites. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Deleting favorites Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump. Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The update takes place automatically and may take several minutes. 1. "Satellite radio" Notes 2. ▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐ uations, such as under certain environmen‐ tal or topographic conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this. "Manage favorites" 3. Highlight the desired favorite. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry" Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes. ▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages; next to tall buildings; or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference. 179 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Communication Entertainment Symbol Meaning Managing the favorites Navigation Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel". Mobility If there is no message, the system changes to the My Favorites category. All favorites currently being broadcast can be selected from a list. Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available. Reference The displayed favorite is played. "Jump to:" Driving tips 1. "Radio" Radio Stored stations General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations. Calling up a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station. Storing a station The station currently selected is stored. 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. "Store station" 4. Select the desired memory location. The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐ mote control currently in use. The stations can also be stored on the program‐ mable memory buttons, refer to page 23. Deleting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry" 180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Controls 2 CD/DVD* drive 3 Eject CD/DVD 4 Change station/track 5 Programmable memory buttons 6 Volume, on/off Symbol Meaning CD/DVD* player ... DVD changer* CD/DVD player, rear* Playable formats CD/DVD* CD/DVD playback ▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVDRW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video*. Loading the CD/DVD* player ▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD*, SVCD*. Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up. ▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC. Playback begins automatically. Reading can take a few minutes with com‐ pressed audio files. Starting playback There is a CD/DVD in the CD/DVD player or changer. Audio playback Selecting the track using the button Press the button repeatedly until the desired track is played. Navigation Change the entertainment source Communication Entertainment 1 Driving tips Controls 3. Select the desired CD or DVD: At a glance CD/multimedia 1. "CD/Multimedia" 181 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility 2. "CD/DVD" CD/multimedia Selecting the track using the iDrive Displaying information on the track Audio CDs If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically: Select the desired track to begin playback. CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files Depending on the data, some letters and num‐ bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐ rectly. 1. Select the directory if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left. ▷ Interpret. ▷ Album track. ▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD. ▷ File name of track. Random playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Random" 2. Select the desired track to begin playback. CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all tracks within the selected directory are played in random order. Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed and the ignition is switched off. Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button. 182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 4. "DVD menu" At a glance Automatic repeat* The selected track, directories, or CDs/DVDs are repeated automatically. Video playback* Country codes Code Region Controls Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the information on the DVD. Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐ rica 2. "CD/DVD" 3 Southeast Asia 4. 4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand 5 Northwest Asia, North Africa 6 China 0 All regions 3. Select a CD with video content. "Select track" 5. Select the desired track. Video menu To open the video menu: turn the controller dur‐ ing playback. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed. Symbol Function Playback Open the DVD menu. The video image is displayed on the front Con‐ trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/ h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the parking brake is set or if the automatic trans‐ mission is in position P. Start playback. Pause Stop Next chapter DVD video Previous chapter 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" Fast forward 3. Select a DVD with video content. Reverse In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev‐ ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback. DVD menu Navigation 2 Communication Entertainment 1. "CD/Multimedia" Mobility USA, Canada Driving tips VCD/SVCD 1 2. "DVD menu" 183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the video menu. CD/multimedia The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐ pends on the contents of the DVD. 4. Select the desired language or "Do not display subtitles". 3. To select menu items: move the controller and press it. To change to the video menu: turn the controller and press it. DVD/VCD settings For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; refer also to the information on the DVD. Selecting the language* Setting the brightness, contrast and color The languages that are available depend on the DVD. 1. Turn the controller during playback. 1. Turn the controller during playback. 3. "Display settings" 2. Open "Options". 4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Audio/language" 4. Select the desired language. Selecting the subtitles* The subtitles that are available depend on the DVD. 5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller. Selecting the zoom Display the video image on the entire screen. 1. Turn the controller during playback. 1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 3. "Subtitles" 4. "Zoom mode" 184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Fold up the DVD changer DVD video: 1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" Always fold the DVD changer back up after filling and emptying it; otherwise, the DVD changer could be damaged.◀ Controls and displays Controls 4. "Select title" 5. Select the desired track. VCD/SVCD: Empty DVD compartments 2 LED on DVD slot 1. Turn the controller during playback. 3 Buttons for DVD compartments 2. Open "Options". 4 DVD slot 3. "Additional options" 5 Fill DVD compartments 4. "Viewing angle" 5. Select the desired camera angle. Opening the main menu, back These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use. DVD changer* Filling the DVD compartments individually 1. Press the button. The LED on the first empty compartment flashes. 2. Select another compartment if necessary. 3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash. In the glove compartment 4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle. The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and placed into the selected compartment. Sliding in CDs/DVDs Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/ DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.◀ Pull down the release cover. The DVD changer tilts down. To close: fold the DVD changer up until it en‐ gages. Navigation 1 Communication Entertainment The availability of a different camera angle de‐ pends on the DVD and the current DVD track. Mobility Selecting the camera angle* Driving tips "Select track" 2. Select the desired track. Filling all empty DVD compartments 1. Hold the button down. 185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 1. At a glance Selecting a track CD/multimedia The LEDs on the empty CD compartments flash. 2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash and then insert a CD or DVD into the center. The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically and placed into the vacant compartments. Sliding in CDs/DVDs Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/ DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. Audio playback* The audio track of a DVD can be played back even if video playback is not possible in the ve‐ hicle. Only the main film without the previews or extras can be played back. Starting playback A DVD is located in the DVD changer. 1. "CD/Multimedia" Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.◀ 2. "CD/DVD" After they are inserted, it may take several mi‐ nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in. Selecting a chapter using the button 3. Select the desired DVD. Press the button repeatedly until the desired chapter is played. Removing a single CD/DVD Press the button. 1. 2. Select the DVD compartment. The CD/DVD is partially ejected. 3. Remove the CD/DVD. Removing all CDs/DVDs Selecting a chapter using iDrive 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD. 4. Select the desired chapter. Fast forward/reverse Hold the button down. 1. Press and hold the button. 2. Remove the CDs/DVDs. Malfunctions Selecting the language* If all LEDs on the DVD changer are flashing rap‐ idly, a malfunction has occurred. The languages that are available depend on the DVD. To eliminate the malfunction: 1. "CD/Multimedia" 1. Press one of the buttons: 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD. ▷ 4. Open "Options". ▷ 5. "Audio/language" The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected. 2. Remove the CD/DVD. The DVD changer is functional again after the LEDs stop flashing rapidly. 6. Select the desired language. Notes CD/DVD player and changer Do not remove the cover 186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and moisture. Use of CDs/DVDs ▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. ▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied, as these can be‐ come detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐ able damage to the device. ▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct sunlight. MACROVISION General malfunctions ▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be. ▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it has been inserted correctly. Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and temporarily prevent playback. Malfunctions involving individual CDs/ DVDs This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered US patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Media protected by this product unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may only be used for private purposes. Copying of this technology is prohibited. Music collection* Storing music General information Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection on a hard disc in the vehicle and played from there. If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following causes: ▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐ pressed audio format. If available, informa‐ tion on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well. Home-recorded CDs/DVDs ▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album. The WMA, MP3, and AAC formats are stored. Individual tracks and directories ▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD. 187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Navigation ▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no longer eject.◀ Communication Entertainment CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐ tection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent. Driving tips CDs/DVDs with copy protection ▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam and no longer eject. Mobility CDs and DVDs At a glance Damage Controls ▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose. Reference BMW CD/DVD players and changers are offi‐ cially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, se‐ vere eye damage may occur.◀ CD/multimedia can be deleted later, Deleting a track and di‐ rectory, refer to page 191. Observe the following during the storage proc‐ ess: Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored but cannot be played back. Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as this will interrupt the storage process. You can switch to the other audio sources without inter‐ rupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD/DVD that have already been stored can be called up. Backing up music data Regularly back up the music data; other‐ wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard disk.◀ Music recognition technology and re‐ lated data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐ ognition technology and related content deliv‐ ery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐ ing. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. Storing from a CD/DVD 1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player. Interrupting storage 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. "Storing..." 4. "Cancel storing" The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time. 2. "CD/Multimedia" Continuing the storage process 3. "CD/DVD" 1. "CD/Multimedia" 4. 2. "CD/DVD" Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. 5. "Store in vehicle" 3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. 4. "Continue storing" Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐ ning of the track at which storage was inter‐ rupted. Album information The music collection is displayed and the first track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the storage process, the tracks are played in se‐ quence. During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this informa‐ tion is available in the vehicle database or on the CD. To update the database, contact your service center. 188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance 3. "Music search" To store music, a suitable device must be con‐ nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐ partment. ▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐ ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players with a USB interface. ▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard discs, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐ tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the USB audio interface in the center armrest. 4. Select the desired category. Driving tips 1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐ face in the glove compartment, refer to page 140. Controls Storing from a USB device 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "Music collection" 5. Select the desired entry. ▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 24, and input the desired entry. ▷ Select the desired entry from the list. 6. Select other categories if you wish. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed. Playing music 7. "Start play" All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album, refer to page 190. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" The list of tracks is repeated automatically. Restarting the music search "New search" Music search using spoken instructions* Instructions for the voice activation system, re‐ fer to page 25. Mobility Music search Press the button on the steering 1. wheel. 189 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 6. "Import music (USB)" Communication Entertainment 5. "Music data import/export" Navigation 4. Open "Options". CD/multimedia 2. ›Music search‹ 1. "CD/Multimedia" 3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select artist‹. 2. "Music collection" 4. Say the desired entry in the list. 5. Select other categories if you wish. To select a track directly: ›Title ... ‹. Say the spoken instruction and the name of the desired track in a single sentence. 3. Select the desired album. Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed. The first track is played automatically, if pos‐ sible. Current playback List of tracks that was generated last by the mu‐ sic search or the album selected last. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Current playback" 4. Change directories if needed to select tracks. To go up a level in the directory: move the controller to the left. Random playback All tracks of the selection are played back in ran‐ dom order. 4. Select the desired track, if necessary. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" Top 50 3. Open "Options". The 50 most frequently played tracks. 4. "Random" 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Top 50" 4. Select the desired track, if necessary. Albums All stored albums, listed in order of their storage dates. Symbol Format Audio CD Compressed audio files 190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track" Display the free memory capacity in the music collection. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 1. "CD/Multimedia" 3. Open "Options". 2. "Music collection" 4. "Free memory" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Rename album" Controls The name of the album, if available, is automat‐ ically entered when the album is stored. If the name is unknown it can be changed later if needed. Free memory capacity Music collection Backing up the music collection The entire music collection can be stored on a USB device. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device. Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur‐ ing a long trip. 1. Starting the engine. 6. Select the letters individually. Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from that album is being played. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐ face in the glove compartment, refer to page 140. 3. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Music collection" 5. Open "Options". 6. "Music data import/export" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete album" Driving tips Renaming an album* Navigation Albums At a glance 4. Open "Options". Communication Entertainment Managing music Deleting a track and directory Mobility A track cannot be deleted while it is being played. A directory cannot be deleted while a track from that directory is being played. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 3. Highlight the directory or track. 191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 2. "Music collection" CD/multimedia 7. "Backup music on USB" AUX-IN port At a glance ▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3 player. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. ▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and volume settings on the audio device. The tone depends on the quality of the audio files. Storing the music collection in the vehicle Connecting When storing from the USB device, the existing music collection in the vehicle is replaced. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Music data import/export" 5. "Restore music from USB" Deleting the music collection The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest. 1. "CD/Multimedia" Connect the headphones or line-out connector of the device to the jack plug. 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete music collection" Playback 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and select a track on the audio device. External devices 2. "CD/Multimedia" At a glance 4. 3. If necessary, "External devices" "AUX front" Volume Symbol Meaning AUX-IN port USB audio interface*/mobile phone audio interface* Rear AUX-IN port* Rear AUX-IN port on the right* The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐ edly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes. Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. If necessary, "External devices" 3. "AUX front" 192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ Playback lists: M3U. At a glance It is possible to connect external audio devices. They can be operated on the iDrive. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. Connectors for external devices ▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐ ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface. ▷ Connection via snap-in adapter when equip‐ ped with extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or mobile phones. The USB audio interface is in the center armrest. To connect the device, use the special cable adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, available from your service center. The cable adapter is required for a good connection. Use the cable adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone to connect the Apple iPod/iPhone with the AUX-IN port and the USB interface. The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is supported by the USB audio inter‐ face. Connection of a USB device via the USB audio interface Playback is only possible if no connector is plugged into the USB audio interface. Due to the large number of different audio devi‐ ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured that every audio device/mobile phone is opera‐ ble on the vehicle. Navigation USB audio interface*/mobile phone audio interface* Communication Entertainment 5. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller. Driving tips Controls Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB audio interface At a glance ▷ AAC. 4. "Volume" The USB audio interface is in the center armrest. Standard audio files can be played back: Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect the USB audio interface and the USB device against physical damage. ▷ MP3. ▷ WMA. ▷ WAV (PCM). 193 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Audio files Mobility Ask your service center about suitable audio de‐ vices/mobile phones. CD/multimedia Connect the USB device to the USB interface. Track search Selection is possible via: ▷ Playback lists. After connecting for the first time Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type of music, as well as playback lists are transmit‐ ted into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks. During transmission, the tracks can be called up via the file directory. ▷ Information: type of music, artist, album, track. ▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory, composer. Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet. Starting the track search 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" Number of tracks 3. Information from up to four USB devices or for approx. 16,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐ hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 16,000 tracks are stored, information on exist‐ ing tracks may be deleted. 4. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or "Artist". Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐ agement (DRM) cannot be played. Select the symbol. All entries are displayed in a list. ▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐ sired entry. When a letter is entered, the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter. If multiple letters are entered, all results that contain that sequence are displayed. ▷ Select the desired entry from the list. Playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the symbol. 5. Select other categories if you wish. The playback starts with the first track. When an Apple iPhone is connected via the snap-in adapter and an audio device is con‐ nected to the AUX-IN port at the same time, the audio signal of the AUX-IN port is played. On the Splitscreen*, the CD cover for the music track might be displayed after a few seconds. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist are to be displayed, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then dis‐ played. 6. "Start play" Restarting a track search "New search" 194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Calling up playback lists. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the symbol. ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface. ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. ▷ Do not use the audio interface to recharge external devices. At a glance Playback lists Controls 4. "Playlists" Current playback List of tracks currently being played. 1. "CD/Multimedia" Select the symbol. 4. "Current playback" Random playback Navigation The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐ dom order. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Open "Options". Communication Entertainment 4. "Random" Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button for the cor‐ responding direction. Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐ vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐ peratures; refer to the audio device operating instructions. Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the files may not play back correctly in each case. Mobility Information on connection ▷ The connected audio device is supplied with a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the device. Therefore, do not connect the de‐ vice to the power socket in the vehicle. ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ nector into the USB interface. 195 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 3. Driving tips 2. "External devices" Rear entertainment Rear entertainment* Controls Rear entertainment and screens are switched on/off. After switching off the ignition, the system must be switched on again. Screens Adjusting Danger of burns when screen is folded out 1 Screen, left 2 Screen, right 3 Center armrest, remote control 4 CD/DVD player Do not reach behind the screen; other‐ wise, there is the danger of getting burned. The back of the screen can become very hot.◀ Rear CD/DVD player ▷ To fold out: pull at the bottom edge. ▷ To fold in: press against the bottom edge. Notes ▷ Do not cover lower screen edge, since this is where the sensors and the infrared inter‐ face are installed. 1 CD/DVD slot 2 Eject CD/DVD 3 On/off, right 4 Headphone connection, right 5 RCA sockets 6 Headphone connection, left 7 On/off, left Switching the system on/off ▷ When loading the rear seats and adjusting the backrest of the front seat, fold in the screens. ▷ When using the through-loading system, fold the screens down. ▷ When cleaning the screen, follow the care instructions, refer to page 253. Press the left or right side of the button on the CD/DVD player in the rear for the respective page. 196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 In the center armrest in the rear Press the but‐ ton Function Adjusts the volume. At a glance Remote control No rechargeable batteries Press the but‐ ton Function Operating concept as for the front controller. Do not use rechargeable batteries, as damage may result from the substances in the batteries.◀ Turn the wheel: highlight a menu item. Press the center knob: con‐ firm the selection. Press the arrow buttons: change between panels. Opens the main menu. Displays the previous menu. 1. Remove the cover. Press on the cover, ar‐ row 1, and push forward, arrow 2. 2. Insert batteries of the same type. Opens the "Options" menu. Changes the station, track or chapter. Press and hold the button: fast forward/reverse. 3. Close the cover. Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐ ter or to your service center. Controls Almost all functions can be operated in the same manner as they are in the front. Special features of operating the system in the rear are described here. 197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Driving tips Replacing the batteries Navigation Menu navigation Communication Entertainment The transmission time of the remote control is limited by law. To execute a function again, press or turn the required button again. Mobility Storage is possible in a vertical or horizontal po‐ sition in the center armrest. Reference For Rear seat entertainment Professional*: Switch over between the display screens. Controls Switches the volume adjust‐ ment to the left/right. Rear entertainment Audio/video playback When music collections are selected in the front and rear, they are played back separately. Audio Operation is the same as for the front music col‐ lection, refer to page 187. Audio can be played back via rear entertainment from any source in the vehicle. Operation is the same as for the front audio play‐ back, refer to page 181. Tone Video Only treble and bass can be set in the rear. The settings are made separately for the left and right headphones. Video can be played back in the rear from the following sources: Operation is the same as for the front tone, refer to page 172. ▷ DVD changer*. ▷ Rear CD/DVD player. ▷ External device in rear. If a video image is being played back in the rear, the rear CD/DVD player cannot be selected in the front. Contacts* Operation is the same as for the front contacts, refer to page 213. Navigation* Operation is the same as for the front video play‐ back, refer to page 183. Route planning can be performed separately on the left and right sides in the rear. Destination guidance can only be started from the front. Radio Operation is the same as for the front navigation, refer to page 154. When the same radio source is selected in the front and rear (e.g., FM/AM), the same radio sta‐ tion is played. Suggesting a destination CD/multimedia A destination or trip can be sent to the front as a suggestion. The suggestion can be adopted, stored, or declined in the front. This function is not available with the following setting: "Driver control". CD/DVD 1. Enter the destination. When the same audio source (front CD/DVD player, rear CD/DVD player, DVD changer) is se‐ lected in the front and rear, the same material is played. 2. "Suggest destination" Operation is the same as for the front radio, refer to page 174. Operation is the same as for the front CD/DVD, refer to page 181. Notes on CDs/DVDs, refer to page 186. BMW Assist* Operation is the same as for BMW Assist in the front, refer to page 216. Adjusting The following settings are available: Music collection* ▷ "Rear displays" Music can only be stored and data can only be exported and imported via the front CD/DVD player or the USB interface in the glove com‐ partment. ▷ "Language/Units": language can be set globally for all screens. ▷ "Tone" ▷ If necessary, "Climate" 198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Enabling Enabling operation in the rear Only possible via the iDrive in the front. 1. "Settings" 2. "Allow rear control" 3. Select the desired priority. ▷ Sound is output in the rear via headphones: the source selected via the iDrive in the front is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. ▷ Sound is output via loudspeakers: the source selected last via the iDrive in the front or rear is output via the vehicle loudspeak‐ ers. The rear has priority ▷ When the source selected in the rear is played on headphones, it can be selected but not operated via iDrive in the front. Other audio or video sources can be operated. ▷ Sound is output in the rear via headphones: the source selected via the iDrive in the front is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. ▷ Sound is output via loudspeakers: the source selected in the rear is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. Audio or video sour‐ ces cannot be selected via the iDrive in the front. Priority options The driver has priority ▷ The source selected via iDrive in the front is output on the vehicle loudspeakers and can be selected but not operated from the rear. Other audio or video sources can be oper‐ ated. ▷ Sound can only be output in the rear via headphones. Switching off the rear DVD ▷ Rear entertainment is switched off. ▷ To switch rear entertainment back on: select a different priority via the iDrive in the front and switch on the system, refer to page 196. Headphones, vehicle loudspeakers ▷ The source that is to be displayed in the rear can be set via the iDrive in the front. Connecting the headphones To set the source in the rear via the iDrive in the front: Normal headphones 1. Open "Options". Mobility Operation is the same as for the front menu op‐ tions, refer to page 21. ▷ All audio and video sources can be operated via the iDrive in the front and rear. Connect via the jack 1/8"/3.5 mm, refer to page 196, on the rear CD/DVD player. 199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference The split screen is not available and there is no integrated Owner's Manual. At a glance Same priority Options menu Controls 3. Select the desired audio or video source. Driving tips Computer content can be displayed. Operation is only possible in the front. Navigation 2. "Select rear source" Communication Entertainment Vehicle information* Rear entertainment Infrared headphones Connection via the infrared interface on the lower edge of the screen. Fitting infrared headphones and information on which headphones are supported can be ob‐ tained from your service center. When using infrared headphones, ensure that the connection between the headphones and the infrared interface is not disrupted: ▷ Do not place an obstacle between the inter‐ face and headphones. 2. Connect the external device to the RCA sockets. ▷ Video: yellow socket. ▷ Audio: white and red socket. Starting playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. ▷ Do not cover the interface. ▷ Do not scratch the interface. Fold up display screens for interference-free re‐ ception. Unfavorable light conditions such as bright am‐ bient light can impair reception. Sound output on the headphones or vehicle loudspeakers Operation is only possible in the rear. 1. Open "Options". 2. "Headphones" or "Loudspeakers" With the following setting, sound output in the rear is not possible via the vehicle speakers: "Driver control". Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐ edly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes. Adjusting the volume The volume can only be adjusted if no external video device is connected. External devices 1. "CD/Multimedia" General information 3. Select the External audio and video devices and digital cameras can be connected to cinch sockets, re‐ fer to page 196, on the CD/DVD player. Opera‐ tion takes place on the external device. 4. "Volume" 2. "External devices" or symbol. Due to the large number of different audio and video devices available on the market, it cannot be ensured that every audio and video device will be displayed correctly on the screen. Connecting an external device 1. Fold down the cover in front of the cinch sockets on the CD/DVD player. 5. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller. 200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance What to do if... ▷ Only a black screen is visible. Switch on the system. ▷ There are no options available on the screen. Replace remote control batteries. Controls With Professional rear seat entertainment toggle between screens if necessary. ▷ Radio stations or TV channels are grayed out and can not be selected. Driving tips Function is limited due to the selected pri‐ ority. Change priority. ▷ The DVD does not play. Playback does not begin automatically. Start DVD manually, refer to page 183. Navigation ▷ The volume of the rear vehicle speakers cannot be adjusted. 201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Sound in the rear is output via the head‐ phones. Change priority if necessary and output sound via vehicle speakers. 202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Communication All of the options available to you for mobile communication with family, friends, business partners, and service providers are described in this chapter. 203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Telephone Telephone* At a glance The concept Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as this may lead to a malfunction. After the mobile phone is paired once with the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using the iDrive, the steering wheel buttons and spo‐ ken instructions. Pairing/unpairing the mobile phone A paired mobile phone is automatically detected as soon as it is located inside the vehicle, when the ignition is switched on. Up to four mobile phones can be paired. Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐ serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐ hicle occupants and other road users.◀ Requirements ▷ The mobile phone is suitable. ▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation. ▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle, refer to page 205, and on the mobile phone. ▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection without confirmation or visibility, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions. Snap-in adapter* ▷ A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass‐ key. It is only required once for pairing. The snap-in adapter is used to: ▷ The ignition is switched on. ▷ Hold the mobile phone. ▷ Recharge the battery. ▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside an‐ tenna of the vehicle. This provides for better network reception and consistent sound quality. Approved mobile phones Inquire with your service center which mobile phones containing a Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package. Additional information can be found at www.bmw.com/bluetooth. These approved mobile phones with a certain software version, support the vehicle functions described below. Pairing and connecting Pairing the mobile phone To avoid becoming distracted and posing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐ cle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐ tionary.◀ Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear Con‐ trol Display. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" 3. "Add new phone" Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions. 204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ Four mobile phones can be paired. ▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐ cure connection; refer to the mobile phone operating instructions. Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations. 1. "Telephone" Driving tips 4. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions: for instance, search for or con‐ nect the Bluetooth device or a new device. At a glance and/or mobile phone to the vehicle; this de‐ pends on the mobile phone. Controls The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ played. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth" The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display. You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey. 6. Enter the passkey and confirm. Connecting a particular mobile phone If more than one mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the list is connected. A different mobile phone can be connected by selecting it. 1. "Telephone" If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐ hicle at once. 3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐ nected. All paired mobile phones are listed. Communication Entertainment Navigation 5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display. If pairing was unsuccessful: what to do if, refer to page 206. ▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in the vehicle within 2 minutes if the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. ▷ After they have been identified, phone book entries are transferred from the SIM card 205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Following the initial pairing Telephone Unpairing the mobile phone 1. "Telephone" ▷ The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch the mobile phone off and on again. 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" ▷ Repeat the pairing procedure. All paired mobile phones are listed. 3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un‐ paired. ▷ If all items on the list have been checked and the mobile phone still cannot be paired, please contact Customer Relations. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Remove phone from list" Controls Incoming call Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Accepting a call Via the button on the steering wheel What to do if... Not all phone book entries are displayed. ▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete; note the display in the sta‐ tus field. ▷ It may only be possible to transmit the phone book entries on the SIM card* or the mobile phone. ▷ It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters. Press the button. Via the instrument cluster "Accept" Via the iDrive "Accept" ▷ The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high. The mobile phone cannot be paired. ▷ Is the mobile phone supported? For infor‐ mation, contact your service center. ▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive. Rejecting a call ▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure. Via the instrument cluster ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con‐ nections with other devices on the mobile phone. "Reject" Via the iDrive "Reject" 206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 "End call" Accepting a call while speaking to another party Via the iDrive 1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. Select an active call. This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly. If a second call comes in during an active call, you will hear a call waiting signal. "Accept" The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold. Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call. 1. "Telephone" Entering a phone number Dialing a number 2. "Active calls" 3. "Hold" The existing call is put on hold. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Dial number" 3. Select the digits individually. Select the symbol. 4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list. Switching between two calls, hold call The phone number can also be entered by voice. Active call: indicated by a red handset. Call on hold: indicated by a green handset. At a glance To switch to the call on hold, select this handset. 207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 4. Controls Via the instrument cluster You can switch between calls and connect two calls to a single conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider. Driving tips General information Press the button. Navigation Via the button on the steering wheel Communication Entertainment Calls with multiple parties Mobility Ending a call Telephone Establishing a conference call Select the symbol. Contact with one phone number. The connection is being es‐ tablished. Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐ phone conference call. 1. Establish two calls. 2. 2. "Conference call" Select the symbol. Contact with more than one phone number. Select the phone number, the connection is being estab‐ lished. A telephone call is not possible, the mobile phone has no coverage or no network or a Serv‐ ice Request is active. Editing a contact When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued. Phone book Change the entries in "Contacts". When a con‐ tact is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle. 1. Highlight the contact. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Edit entry" The contact can be edited. Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Phone book" All contacts with a phone number are displayed. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts, refer to page 213. Redialing General information The eight phone numbers dialed last are dis‐ played. Dialing the number via the instrument cluster This is possible when there is no active call. Press the button on the steering 1. wheel. 2. Select the desired phone number. The connection is established. Dialing the number via the iDrive 1. "Telephone" 2. "Redial" 3. Select the desired entry. Calling a contact 1. Select the desired contact. The connection is established. 208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list" 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact" Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 2. Open "Options". 5. Complete the entries if necessary. 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact" 6. If necessary. "Store contact". 4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business", "Mobile" or "Other" Messages 5. Complete the entries if necessary. 6. If necessary. "Store contact". ▷ My Info messages from the BMW Assist portal. Received calls ▷ Message from the Concierge service, refer to page 217. Displaying calls MyInfo The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐ played. Starting destination guidance Display of different messages: 1. Select the message. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Received calls" 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest." Dialing the number in the message 1. Select the message. 2. "Call" Message from the Concierge service Using an address in destination guidance 1. Select the message. 2. Calling a number from the list "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest." Selecting an entry. At a glance 2. Open "Options". Controls 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". Driving tips 1. Highlight the entry. Navigation Saving an entry in the contacts Communication Entertainment Deleting a single entry or all entries The connection is established. 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list" 3. Start destination guidance, if necessary. 209 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Deleting a single entry or all entries Telephone Dialing the number in the message 1. Select the message. 2. "Call" Storing an address 1. Select the message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store contact in vehicle" Deleting messages 1. Highlight the message. 2. Open "Options". Voice operation* The concept ▷ The mobile phone can be operated without taking your hands from the steering wheel. ▷ In many cases, the entries are accompanied by announcements or questions. ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system. Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system 3. "Delete message" or "Delete all messages" 1. Hands-free system General information Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa. From the mobile phone to the handsfree system Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with the ignition switched on. Depending on the mobile phone, the system au‐ tomatically switches to the hands-free system. If the system does not switch over automatically, follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐ play; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions. From the hands-free system to the mobile phone Calls that are made on the hands-free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone. Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐ play; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions. Briefly press the button on the steering wheel. 2. Say the command. Terminating the voice activation system Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or ›Cancel‹. Possible commands Having possible commands read aloud Press the button. ›Help‹. Possible commands are announced. The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The digits can be spoken separately or combined in a sequence to accelerate the entry. Using alternative commands In many cases, the system is able to recognize several commands to execute the same func‐ tion, such as the following: ›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹ Example: dialing a phone number 1. Briefly press the button on the steering wheel. 2. ›Dial number‹ The system says: »Please say the number« 210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 The system says: »123 456 790. Continue? « 4. ›Dial number‹ Deleting an entry 1. ›Delete name‹ 2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. 3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹. At a glance 3. E.g., ›123 456 790‹ The system says: »Dialing number« 1. ›Delete phone book‹ Correcting the phone number The sequence of digits can be deleted after the system has repeated the digits. ›Correct number‹ The command can be repeated as often as nec‐ essary. Deleting a phone number ›Delete‹ All digits entered up to that point are deleted. Redialing 3. Confirm the query again with ›Yes‹. Reading and selecting entries 1. ›Read phone book‹ The dialog for reading the phone book is opened. 2. Say ›Dial number‹ when the desired entry is read. Selecting an entry 1. ›Dial name‹ 2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. 3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹. Adjusting the volume ›Redial‹ Turn the knob during an announcement. Voice phone book* Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it may be necessary to create your own voice phone book. The entries must be entered using voice activa‐ tion and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up. Saving an entry 1. ›Save name‹ 2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking duration of approx. 2 seconds. 3. Say the phone number after being prompted to do so by the system. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed. ▷ The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use. Notes Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐ ephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to page 246, in the vicinity of the interior mirror. Driving tips 3. ›Dial‹ 2. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹. Navigation 2. Say the phone number. Communication Entertainment 1. ›Dial number‹ The dialog for deleting the phone book is opened. Mobility Dialing a phone number Controls Deleting all entries Calling 211 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 4. ›Save‹ Telephone Environmental conditions Inserting the mobile phone ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. ▷ Keep the doors and windows closed to pre‐ vent noise interference. ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking. Snap-in adapter* Installation position In the center armrest. Inserting the snap-in adapter 1. Press the button and remove the cover. 1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove the protective cap from the antenna con‐ nector of the mobile phone. 2. Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac‐ ing up in the direction of the electrical con‐ nections, arrow 1, and push downward, ar‐ row 2 until it engages. Removing the mobile phone Press the button and remove the mobile phone. 2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐ row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐ gages. 212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐ tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐ tinations for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed directly. 7. If necessary, "Store". 8. "Store contact in vehicle" Specifying a contact as the home address A contact can be stored as the home address. It is placed at the top of "My contacts". Controls General information At a glance Contacts 1. "Home" 2. "New contact" Driving tips 1. "Contacts" 2. Create a contact. My contacts General information A list of all contacts in the vehicle and mobile phone. Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts" Navigation New contact 3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐ ous entries: "Delete input fields" 4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field. All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. An A-Z search is offered, refer to page 24, if there are 30 or more contacts. Communication Entertainment 2. "My contacts" 5. Enter the text, refer to page 24. 6. When equipped with a navigation system: Enter the address. Only addresses con‐ tained in the navigation data in the vehicle can be entered. This ensures that destina‐ tion guidance is possible for all addresses. 213 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts: Contacts Symbol Storage location No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination. In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination. Mobile phone Displaying the detailed view 2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary. If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone. Dialing phone numbers* 1. "My contacts" Select the desired contact. 2. Select the desired contact. All fields that have been filled in for that contact are displayed. 3. Select the desired phone number. Selecting the name display Editing a contact Names can be displayed in a different order. 1. "My contacts" 1. "My contacts" 2. Select the desired contact. 2. Highlight the contact. 3. "Edit contact" The connection is established. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first, last name" Depending on how the contacts were stored on your mobile phone, the names may be displayed differently than the display selected. Selecting the contact as a navigation destination* 1. "My contacts" 2. Select the desired contact. 3. Select the desired address. When contacts from the mobile phone are used, the address may need to be matched to the nav‐ igation data contained in the vehicle. In this case: Correct the address. Checking the address as a destination* 4. Change the entries. 5. Move the controller to the left. 6. "Yes" If a contact from the mobile phone is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is displayed. Under certain circum‐ stances, a contact entry with the same name is created. Deleting contacts An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con‐ tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose. Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can‐ not be deleted. 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address. 2. Highlight the contact. 1. "My contacts" 214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts". Exporting/importing contacts 215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls Contacts can be exported and imported via the Personal Profile, refer to page 33. BMW Assist BMW Assist BMW Assist* General information BMW Assist provides you with various services, for instance, transmission of the position data of your vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Cen‐ ter if an Emergency Request* is initiated. Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi‐ vidually agreed upon contract. After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without your having to visit a service center. After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will be available. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a service center after you sign a new contract. Requirements ▷ The installed BMW Assist system is logged in to a wireless communications network. This network must be capable of transmit‐ ting the services. ▷ To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position. ▷ To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS signal must be available. ▷ The BMW Assist service contract was signed with your service center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling must have been completed. ▷ BMW Assist is activated. Services offered ▷ Emergency Request: when you press the SOS button, a connection to the BMW As‐ sist Response Center is established. The BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you. serious accident. If possible, the BMW As‐ sist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you. ▷ Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break‐ down. If possible, the vehicle and position data are transmitted in the process. ▷ Customer Relations: connection with Cus‐ tomer Relations for information on all as‐ pects of your vehicle. ▷ TeleService: data on your vehicle's service status or required inspections are transmit‐ ted to your service center, either automati‐ cally before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment. ▷ Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re‐ sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex‐ ample, the remote control is not available and the vehicle needs to be opened. ▷ Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the BMW Assist Response Center can deter‐ mine its position. ▷ In addition to these services, the optional Convenience Plan offers a Concierge serv‐ ice and information for route planning, traf‐ fic, and weather. A limited number of calls can be made via the BMW Assist Response Center with Critical Calling if, for example, the mobile phone is not available or dis‐ charged. Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center. ▷ You can also access the BMW Assist Con‐ cierge service via the Internet. ▷ Automatic Collision Notification: under cer‐ tain conditions, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a 216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance 2. "Concierge" General information TeleService supports communication with your service center. ▷ Connection costs may ensue. ▷ Services may be restricted abroad. Requirements ▷ BMW Assist is activated. A voice connection is established with the BMW Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle. Open the message via the message list, refer to page 209. Roadside Assistance ▷ Wireless reception is available. At a glance ▷ The engine is running. BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break‐ down. Concierge service* General information The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐ mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con‐ cierge service. The Concierge service is part of the optional Convenience Plan. 1. "BMW Assist" 2. "Roadside Assistance" The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐ played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐ nection is established to Roadside Assis‐ tance. 217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 1. "BMW Assist" Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService Mobility Starting the Concierge service Starting Roadside Assistance Driving tips ▷ The service varies by country. 3. "Start service" Navigation ▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve‐ hicle's condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance. Controls ▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements can be sent directly to the service center. In this way, the service center can plan its work in advance. This shortens the duration of the service appointment. Communication Entertainment TeleService* BMW Assist Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService Activating BMW Assist* 1. "BMW Assist" General information 2. "Roadside Assistance" If the services included in a Assist subscription are not displayed, they may need to be activated. 3. "Start service" Activating 1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its current position. Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. 2. Switch on the ignition. 3. "Activate BMW Assist" TeleService Diagnosis* TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are transmitted automatically. After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐ nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐ lished. TeleService Help* TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire‐ less transmission. TeleService Help can be started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance and the termination of the voice connection. Starting TeleService Help 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. The engine is running. 4. "TeleService Help" After completion of TeleService Help, a voice connection is established to Roadside Assis‐ tance. Activation may take several minutes. If another menu is opened, activation continues running in the background. BMW Search* At a glance A business search can be opened via BMW Search. License conditions This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐ ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐ tries. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Requirements ▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience Plan. ▷ The date setting, refer to page 80, on the Control Display is current. ▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐ work coverage. Starting BMW Search 1. "BMW Assist" 218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Customer Relations At a glance Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle. At a glance 2. "BMW Search" 3. If necessary, "OK". 1. "BMW Assist" The BMW Search home page is displayed. 2. "Customer Relations" Using BMW Search The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐ played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐ nection is established to Customer Relations. ▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element. ▷ Press the controller to display an element. 1. Open "Options". 2. "Display start page" Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" 2. "Customer Relations" 3. "Start service" Loading a new page 1. Open "Options". Service Request* 2. "Reload" At a glance Cancel 1. Open "Options". 2. "Cancel loading" Sends information to your service partner to re‐ quest the arrangement of a service appoint‐ ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐ ing a Service Request. If possible, your service partner will establish contact with you. Starting a Service Request Communication Entertainment Navigation Opening the start page Mobility To start a search: Driving tips Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService Controls Calling Customer Relations 2. "Service Request" 219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 1. "BMW Assist" BMW Assist Data transfer* 3. "Start service" The status of the data transfer is displayed. 1. "BMW Assist" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Data transfer" Services status* Displaying available services Automatic Service Request* The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your service partner prior to the service deadline. If possible, the service partner will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged. Display of all services available in the vehicle. 1. "BMW Assist" 2. "Service status" 3. "Available services" Activating BMW Assist To check when your service partner was noti‐ fied: If the services included in a Assist subscription are not displayed, they may need to be activated. 1. "Vehicle Info" "Activate BMW Assist" 2. "Vehicle status" Activating TeleService TeleService may need to be activated in the ve‐ hicle. "Activate TeleService" Deactivating TeleService Even if the services of TeleService have been deactivated, a voice connection to Roadside As‐ sistance is still possible. "Deactivate TeleService" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request" 220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference 221 Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance 222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this chapter supplies you with important information on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside Assistance. 223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Refueling Refueling Fuel cap Opening Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed prop‐ erly and fuel vapors can escape. 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap. A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.◀ Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐ ample. 1. Open the cover on the right side trim. 2. Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise. 2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym‐ bol. This releases the fuel filler flap. 3. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket at‐ tached to the fuel filler flap. Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Closing Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. Do not pinch the retaining strap Handling fuels Obey safety regulations posted at the gas station.◀ 224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Fuel tank capacity Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters Refuel promptly 225 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls Refuel below a range of 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage may occur.◀ Fuel Fuel Fuel quality Refuel with unleaded fuel only Do not use leaded fuel as this would per‐ manently damage the catalytic converter.◀ Do not refuel with ethanol Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐ tem.◀ Required fuel The use of poor-quality fuels may result in drive‐ ability, starting and stalling problems especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude. Should you encounter driveability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in unscheduled maintenance.◀ Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 or AKI 89 BMW recommends AKI 91 or 89. Gasoline with lower AKI The minimum AKI Rating is 89. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life. Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐ mum specified fuel grade; otherwise, engine damage may occur.◀ Use high-quality brands Field experience has indicated significant differ‐ ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad‐ ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10 % etha‐ nol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 % oxygen by weight, that is, 15 % MTBE or 3 % methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship. Minimum fuel grade 226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ▷ Maximum allowable driving speed. Safety information Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ sure influence the following: ▷ The service life of the tires. ▷ Road safety. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐ ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 227, and adjust as necessary. At a glance Tire inflation pressure Controls Wheels and tires Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher. Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀ Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein‐ itialize the Tire Pressure Monitor. Tire size Pressure specifications Specifications in psi/ kilopascal with cold tires The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 227, contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐ perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐ proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y Pressure specifica‐ tions in psi/kPa 2.2 / 32 - R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y - 2.4 / 35 F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL 2.4 / 35 - - 2.6 / 38 Mobility After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein‐ itialize the Flat Tire Monitor. These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar. R.: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL ▷ Vehicle load. 227 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐ correct tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.◀ Communication Entertainment Checking the pressure Navigation Driving tips ▷ Driving comfort. Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in psi/kPa Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in psi/kPa F.: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL 2.6 / 38 - 2.6 / 38 - - 3.0 / 44 F.: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL - 3.0 / 44 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38 R.: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL 245/50 R 18 100 Y R.: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 245/50 R 18 100 Y 245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S 245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL 2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38 Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex‐ cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀ Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h With partial load Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in psi/kPa Specifications in psi/ kilopascal with cold tires 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL With full load Tire size Specifications in psi/ kilopascal with cold tires F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y 2.5 / 36 F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL 2.5 / 36 - - 2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38 - - 3.0 / 44 2.9 / 42 3.2 / 46 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 R.: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL F.: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL R.: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL 2.2 / 32 - R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y - 2.4 / 35 F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL 2.4 / 35 - - 2.6 / 38 R.: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL 2.3 / 33 R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y - 245/50 R 18 100 Y F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y Pressure specifica‐ tions in psi/kPa 245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL 228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Temperature A B C Tire size All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires Speed letter T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h Traction Tire Identification Number The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3508 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 3508: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Tire age DOT … 3508: the tire was manufactured in the 35th week in 2008. Recommendation: regardless of wear, replace tires at least every 6 years. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfa‐ ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐ planing, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐ tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 229 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Controls 103: load rating, not for ZR tires Driving tips 19: rim diameter in inches The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and cli‐ mate. Navigation R: radial tire code Treadwear Communication Entertainment 50: aspect ratio in % Mobility 255: nominal width in mm Reference 255/50 R 19 103 Y At a glance Tire identification marks Wheels and tires Temperature grade for this tire Minimum tread depth The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐ sible tire failure. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ RSC – Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 232, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall. Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. M+S They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires. Tire damage Tire tread Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐ jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Summer tires Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ fects: Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. ▷ Unusual vibrations during driving. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right. In case of tire damage Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation. If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the next service center or tire shop. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ Repair of tire damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ sult.◀ 230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 DOT … 3508: the tire was manufactured in the 35th week in 2008. Changing wheels and tires Mounting Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center or tire specialist. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀ Wheel and tire combination Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐ tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob‐ tained from your service center. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible. Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐ mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model. For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires. Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de‐ sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.◀ Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 ℉/+7 ℃. Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐ vide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires. Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of 231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Driving tips Controls On the sidewall: Information on mounting tires At a glance Recommended tire brands Navigation Manufacture date Communication Entertainment regardless of wear, replace tires at least every 6 years. Mobility Recommendation The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐ ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they are mounted.◀ Reference Tire age Wheels and tires vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐ cialist or from your service center. Maximum speed for winter tires The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐ main drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss. Do not exceed the maximum speed for the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐ dents can occur.◀ Continued driving with damaged tires, refer to page 96. Run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you. For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you. Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles. This can impair the handling characteristics. Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Run-flat tires Label Changing run-flat tires Snow chains Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle, classified as road-safe and recommended. Consult your service center for more informa‐ tion. Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the same tire size: ▷ 245/50 R 18. ▷ 245/45 R 19. Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐ ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary. RSC label on the tire sidewall. Maximum speed with snow chains The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐ gree. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains. 232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 When using snow chains, you should set whether you are driving with or without snow chains via the iDrive. The snow chain detection system supports you by automatically showing the detected state on the Control Display. If the status indicating that snow chains are in use is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti‐ vated automatically. At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again, even though snow chains are in use. When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer‐ ing of the Integral Active Steering* is deacti‐ vated automatically. Driving tips At speeds above the maximum allowable speed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again automatically. At a glance The concept Activating/deactivating rear axle steering Controls Snow chain detection* Activating the status 1. "Settings" Navigation 2. "Tire chains" 3. "Tire chains installed" Automatic detection If functioning properly: Communication Entertainment ▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not activated . After you drive a short distance, the mes‐ sage is shown on the Control Display and the status is activated automatically. Confirm the automatic activation. ▷ Snow chains are not mounted. The setting is activated . At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a warning lamp lights up and a message is displayed. Deactivate the status manually. If not functioning properly: ▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not activated . The automatic detection system is malfunc‐ tioning. Activate the status manually. 233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility A message does not appear on the Control Display. Engine compartment Engine compartment Important features in the engine compartment 1 Vehicle identification number* 4 Jump starting, positive terminal 2 Jump starting, negative terminal 5 Oil filler neck 3 Washer fluid reservoir 6 Coolant reservoir Hood 1. Pull the lever. Opening the hood Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀ 234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Controls At a glance 2. Press the release handle and open the hood. Navigation Driving tips 3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood. Danger of injury when the hood is open Communication Entertainment There is a danger of injury from protruding parts when the hood is open.◀ Closing the hood Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must audibly engage on both sides. Mobility Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐ diately and close it securely.◀ Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ 235 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Danger of pinching Engine oil Engine oil Checking the oil level The concept The oil level is monitored electronically and dis‐ played on the Control Display. Requirements ▷ The engine must be running and warm after the vehicle has been driven for at least 6 miles/10 km. Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immedi‐ ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐ gine damage.◀ ▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this checked." Note the newly calculated remaining mile‐ age until the next oil service. Have the sys‐ tem checked as soon as possible. ▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a level roadway. Adding engine oil Displaying the oil level Filler neck 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" When the indicator lights up in the instrument cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within the next 125 miles/200 km. Possible messages ▷ "Engine oil level OK" ▷ "Measurement not possible at this time." Duration with the engine running: ap‐ prox. 3 minutes. Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes. ▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 quart!" Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km. ▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this checked." Have the vehicle checked immediately. Recommended oil types, refer to page 236 Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐ dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.◀ Oil types Note No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐ age.◀ 236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Your service center can advise you on which en‐ gine oils have been approved by the manufac‐ turer of your vehicle. Have your service center check the coolant level and add coolant, if necessary. The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Disposal Only use approved BMW High Performance oil. Approved oils belong to the following viscosity classes: SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and SAE 5W-30. Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives. At a glance Coolant level Controls Approved oil types Alternative oil types Driving tips If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of another oil with the follow‐ ing specification may be used. Communication Entertainment Navigation API SM specifications or higher Coolant General information Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.◀ Suitable additives Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suit‐ able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for suitable additives. 237 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐ gine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.◀ Maintenance Maintenance BMW Maintenance System The system obtains information about the road safety and opera‐ tional reliability of the vehicle and takes into account aspects such as a timely vehicle check. The aim is to optimize maintenance pro‐ cedures with a view to reducing the cost of run‐ ning the vehicle. Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐ mines the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile. Details on the service requirements, refer to page 82, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐ mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements. Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have regular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐ cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐ tries are proof of regular maintenance. Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnostics Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is con‐ tinuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your ve‐ hicle. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ mote control that you used most recently. Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐ vated-charcoal filter. On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check‐ ing the primary components in the vehicle emis‐ sions. Emissions values ▷ The warning lamp lights up: The emissions values are deterio‐ rating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning lamp flashes under cer‐ tain circumstances: 238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine. Controls Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control compo‐ nents, in particular the catalytic con‐ verter. Fuel filler cap The indicator lamp lights up. Driving tips If the fuel cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system may conclude that fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened, the display should go out in a short time. Data memory 239 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op‐ eration, faults and user settings. These data are stored in the remote control and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the ve‐ hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way provide valuable information for service proc‐ esses and repair or for optimizing and develop‐ ing vehicle functions further. In addition, if you signed a service contract for Assist, certain ve‐ hicle data can be sent directly from the vehicle to facilitate the desired services. Replacing components Replacing components Tool kit Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the wind‐ shield.◀ Lamp and bulb replacement General information The tool kit is located in the rear compartment in the trunk, refer to page 143. Wiper blade replacement Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to page 72, the wiper arms. 2. Fold up the wipers. Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to your service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your service center. Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.◀ Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system, you should always switch off the lights affected to prevent short circuits. 3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐ sition. 4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.◀ Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover serve as the light source for controls, display el‐ ements and other equipment. 240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When the light is switched on, the condensation evapo‐ rates after a short time. The headlamp glasses do not need to be changed. If there is a large amount of moisture, e.g., water droplets form in the lamp, have it checked by your service center. Turn signals, incl. side indicators Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 240. These lamps are made using LED technology. Please contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Adaptive light control Front lamps, bulb replacement Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 240. At a glance The illustration shows the left side of the engine compartment. 55-watt bulb, H3 1. Open the folding cover in the engine com‐ partment. 1 Adaptive light control 2 Parking lamp, daytime running lights* 3 Low beams/high beams 4 Turn signal 2. Turn the cap and remove it. At a glance Controls Headlamp glass For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center. Driving tips Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐ wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀ Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐ ried out improperly.◀ Navigation Do not remove the covers Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐ cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Communication Entertainment These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Xenon headlamps* If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations. Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps 241 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐ lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life. Replacing components 3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise. 2. Remove the screws. 4. Remove the bulb and replace it. 3. Pull the lamp out toward the front. 5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in the reverse order. 4. Remove the bulb and replace it. Parking lamps 5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in the reverse order. Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 240. Tail lamps, bulb replacement These lamps are made using LED technology. At a glance Please contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Front fog lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 240. 35-watt bulb, H8 1. Carefully pull out the grill toward the front. 1 Turn signal 2 Backup lamp 3 Rear fog lamp* 4 Tail lamp 5 Brake lamp Turn signal, brake, tail, and license plate lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 240. These lights are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. 242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 4. Replace the bulb. At a glance Rear fog lamp and backup lamps in the tailgateBackup lamps in the tailgate Accessing the lamps Controls 1. Remove the four screws using the screw driver from the tool kit. To change the rear fog lamp, contact your serv‐ ice center. Backup lamp 16-watt bulb, W16W Changing wheels Notes Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, refer to page 232, as standard equipment. They do not need to be replaced immediately in the event of a puncture. When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat tires for your own safety. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center. 243 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility Turn the bulb, pull it out, and replace it. Reference 3. Pull off the connector toward the left. Communication Entertainment Navigation 2. Pull down the cover with a firm tug. Driving tips Rear fog lamps Replacing components Jacking points for the vehicle jack Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐ trolyte will last for the life of the battery. Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery. Battery replacement The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ cated in the positions shown. Lug bolt lock* Use approved vehicle batteries only. Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ ble.◀ After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available. Charging the battery The lug bolt lock is found in the tool kit. In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the terminals, refer to page 247, in the engine com‐ partment with the engine off. Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: ▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory: store the positions again, refer to page 57. ▷ Time: update, refer to page 80. ▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1. ▷ Date: update, refer to page 80. ▷ Adapter, arrow 2. ▷ Radio station: Save again, refer to page 174. Removing ▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability of the navigation. 1. Attach the adapter to the wheel lug. 2. Unscrew the lug bolt. Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt back on. Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or take them to a recy‐ cling center. 244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport. Fuses Controls Notes Replacing fuses Driving tips Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀ Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the trunk. Communication Entertainment Navigation In the glove compartment Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid, arrow 2. Open the cover on the right side trim. Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet. 245 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility In the trunk Breakdown assistance Breakdown assistance Hazard warning flashers After deactivation, an Emergency Request is no longer possible. ▷ The system can be reactivated by a service center after you sign a new contract. Initiating an Emergency Request The button for the hazard warning flashers is lo‐ cated in the center console. Emergency Request* Requirements ▷ Equipment version with full preparation package mobile phone. An Emergency Request can be made, even if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐ hicle. ▷ BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 218. ▷ The radio ready state is switched on. ▷ The BMW Assist system is functional and logged into a wireless communications net‐ work. ▷ The emergency call system is functional. Only use Emergency Request in an emergency. Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐ quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.◀ Service contract ▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐ pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐ tivated by the service center without you having to visit a workshop. 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up. ▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request was initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab‐ lished. ▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been es‐ tablished. After the Emergency Request arrives at the BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstan‐ ces. For this purpose, data that are used to de‐ termine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle if it can be established, are transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center. ▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard on the hands-free system, the hands-free system 246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Jump starting Notes If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles. The warning triangle is located on the left in the trunk. Release the Velcro® fastener to remove it. First aid kit* To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ dure. Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury, always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐ nents while the engine is running.◀ Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐ mately the same capacity in Ah. This infor‐ mation can be found on the battery. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ cle. 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles. The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐ ment on the right side in the trunk. Fold up the cover to remove it. Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐ ularly and replace any items promptly. At a glance Controls Driving tips Phone numbers of the Response Center of Roadside Assistance in your home country: re‐ fer to the Contact brochure. Navigation Warning triangle* Roadside Assistance from the BMW Group pro‐ vides around-the-clock assistance in the event of a breakdown, including on weekends and hol‐ idays. Communication Entertainment Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ quest is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐ tion is not affected by pressing the button. Service availability Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be‐ tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀ Mobility Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Roadside Assistance Starting aid terminals Connecting order 247 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW Assist Response Center may still be able to hear you. Breakdown assistance Connect the jumper cables in the correct order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.◀ sponding engine or body ground of the ve‐ hicle to be started. Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed. 2. Start the engine of the other vehicle as usual. The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐ minal. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐ tery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary. Tow-starting and towing Tow fitting The body ground or a special nut acts as the negative terminal. Connecting the cables 1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐ minal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance. 3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos‐ itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐ sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle providing assis‐ tance. 5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg‐ ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐ The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is located in the tool kit under the trunk floor. Tow fitting, information on use ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐ hicle can occur.◀ 248 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Manually release the transmission lock, even if there is no malfunction involving the transmis‐ sion. Otherwise, there is the danger that the transmission lock will be engaged automatically during towing.◀ At a glance Screw thread General information ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle raised, as the front wheels could turn. Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.◀ Do not tow when the electronics system has failed. Do not tow the vehicle when the electronics sys‐ tem has failed; otherwise, the electric steering lock cannot be unlocked and the vehicle cannot be steered.◀ Observe before towing Vehicle without manual parking lock*: Transport the vehicle on a loading plat‐ form only. If your vehicle is not equipped with a manual parking lock*, it may not be towed. Have the vehicle transported on a loading plat‐ form only or the vehicle can be damaged.◀ Vehicle with manual parking lock*: Manually release the transmission lock ▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐ quired. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ pending on local regulations. ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ dow. Adhere to the towing speed and distance Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/ 50 km/h and a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km or damage to the transmission can occur.◀ Towing methods Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀ Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: 249 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle re‐ sponse.◀ ▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steer‐ ing. Reference Light towing vehicle Driving tips Towing ▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐ available. Push out the cover by pressing on the arrow symbol. Navigation Observe all notes on towing or vehicle damage or accidents can occur.◀ Communication Entertainment Observe the notes on towing Controls Towing* Breakdown assistance ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during cor‐ nering. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset. Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐ ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐ cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀ Tow truck Vehicle without manual parking lock*: Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. Do not lift the vehicle. Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀ Secure the vehicle against rolling off. Apply the parking brake after towing and secure the vehicle against rolling off if neces‐ sary. Have the operability of transmission position P checked by the service center.◀ Tow-starting Note Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Have vehicles transported on a loading platform only. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐ edied. Do not tow the vehicle with the front or rear axle lifted individually or the vehicle can be dam‐ aged.◀ Do not lift the vehicle. Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀ Secure the vehicle against rolling off. Apply the parking brake after towing and secure the vehicle against rolling off if neces‐ sary. Have the operability of transmission position P checked by the service center.◀ Vehicle with manual parking lock*: 250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐ age or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. Follow the operating instructions for the highpressure washer.◀ Cleaning sensors/cameras with highpressure washers When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., Park Distance Control*, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/ 30 cm.◀ Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐ hicle. Washing in automatic car washes Your vehicle can be washed in automatic car washes right from the start. Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.◀ Controls When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/ 60 ℃. Guide rails in car washes Before driving into a car wash The vehicle is able to roll when the following steps are taken: 1. Press on the brake pedal. 2. Engage transmission position N. 3. Release the parking brake, refer to page 67, or deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to page 69. 4. Switch the engine off. Transmission position P with the igni‐ tion off When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an auto‐ matic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀ The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in transmission position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle. Transmission position Transmission position P is engaged automati‐ cally: Driving tips Steam jets or high-pressure washers Navigation Notes ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 71, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐ vation. Communication Entertainment Car washes At a glance Care ▷ When the ignition is switched off. ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms. ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle. ▷ After approx. 15 minutes. Headlamps ▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caustic cleansers. ▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to insects, with shampoo and wash off with water. 251 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility Note the following: Reference Notes Care ▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. After washing the vehicle Suitable care products are available from the service center. After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur. Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved. Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐ cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐ gerous and harmful to your health.◀ Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences can act on the vehicle paint. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car care to these influences. Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently as dust and dirt are more noticeable. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐ terial vigorously. Damage from Velcro® fasteners Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀ Caring for special components Light-alloy wheels Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's instructions. Chrome surfaces* Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐ larly when they have been exposed to road salt. Rubber components Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐ ers. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐ icon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping. Fine wood parts* Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth. 252 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Displays/screens These include: Use a microfiber cloth to clean the Control Dis‐ play or the Head-up Display*. Cleaning displays ▷ Lamp lenses. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Moisten the cloth lightly and use plastic cleanser, if necessary. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐ ces or electrical components. Do not soak the headliner. Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.◀ Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐ vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.◀ Long-term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months. Navigation Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety. Chemical cleaning Communication Entertainment Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the webbing.◀ Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry. Carpets and floor mats* Floor mats can be removed from the passenger compartment for cleaning. If they are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or an interior cleaner. To prevent mat‐ ting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the di‐ rection of travel only. Mobility Sensors/cameras To clean the sensors or cameras of equipment such as the High-beam Assistant*, Active Cruise Control* or Night Vision*, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner. 253 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Driving tips ▷ Matte black spray-coated components. ers. Controls Do not use chemical or household cleans‐ ▷ Instrument cluster cover. Reference ▷ Headliner. At a glance Plastic components 254 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference This chapter contains technical data, short commands for the voice activation system, and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need. 255 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Technical data Technical data Dimensions Width with mirrors, height with roof-mounted aerial Width without mirrors 256 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Engine specifications Ø: 40 ft/12.2 m The rated power outputs are established on the basis of fuel grade AKI 91. 535i Displacement cu in/cm³ No. of cylinders 181.8/2,979 6 Maximum output hp 300 at engine speed rpm 5,800-6,250 Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 300/407 at engine speed rpm 1,200-5,000 cu in/cm³ 268.2/4,395 Communication Entertainment Smallest turning circle Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Length, wheel base No. of cylinders 8 257 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Displacement Mobility 550i Technical data 550i Maximum output hp 400 at engine speed rpm 5,500-6,400 Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 450/610 at engine speed rpm 1,750-4,500 Weights 535i Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,667/2,570 Load lbs/kg 1,014/460 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,580/1,170 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,263/1,480 Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 Trunk capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,954/2,700 Load lbs/kg 1,014/460 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,811/1,275 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,308/1,500 Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 Trunk capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700 550i Capacities Notes Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Windshield and headlamp washer system US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5.0 258 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Fuel quality, refer to page 226 Controls Owner's Manual ›Owner's Manual‹ Opening the music collection ›Music collection‹ Opening the tone settings ›Tone‹ Opening the settings ›Settings‹ Opening the profiles ›Profiles‹ Opening the computer ›Onboard info‹ Opening the contacts ›Contacts‹ Displaying the phone book ›Phonebook‹ Opening BMW Assist ›B M W Assist‹ Opening the destination input ›Enter address‹ Navigation Command Communication Entertainment Function Driving tips Useful short commands CD/multimedia* CD/DVD drive Function Command Playing back a CD ›C D on‹ Selecting a CD ›Select C D‹ Selecting a CD and track ›C D ... track ... ‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5 Selecting a track ›C D track ... ‹ e.g., track 5 Opening the CD and multimedia menu ›C D and multimedia‹ 259 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Mobility Instructions for voice activation system, refer to page 25. To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: ›Voice commands‹ Reference General information At a glance Short commands for voice activation system Short commands for voice activation system Function Command CD and DVD ›C D‹ Displaying entertainment details on the split screen ›Entertainment details‹ Music collection Function Command Calling up the current playback ›Current playback‹ Opening the music collection ›Music collection‹ Playing the music collection ›Music collection on‹ Searching for music; opening the menu ›Music search‹ Playing back the most frequently played tracks ›Top fifty‹ External devices Function Command Opening external devices ›External devices‹ Call up Bluetooth devices ›Bluetooth‹ AUX front ›AUX front‹ Tone Function Command Opening the tone settings ›Tone‹ Radio FM Function Command Calling up the radio ›Radio‹ Calling up an FM station ›F M‹ Opening manual search ›Manual‹ 260 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Command Calling up a frequency ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g., 93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5 Selecting the frequency range ›Select frequency‹ At a glance Function Opening manual search ›Manual‹ Calling up a frequency ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐ quency 753 or 753 kilohertz Weather Band Function Command Calling up the Weather Band ›Weather band‹ Switching on the Weather Band ›Weather band on‹ Selecting a Weather Band station ›Select a weather channel‹ Satellite radio Function Command Calling up the satellite radio ›Satellite radio‹ Switching on the satellite radio ›Satellite radio on‹ Selecting a satellite radio channel ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite radio channel 2 Stored stations Function Command Opening the stored stations ›Presets‹ Choosing a stored station ›Select preset‹ Selecting a stored station ›Preset ... ‹ e.g., stored station 2 261 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Navigation ›A M‹ Communication Entertainment Calling up an AM station Mobility Command Reference Function Driving tips Controls AM Short commands for voice activation system Telephone* Function Command Opening the Telephone menu ›Telephone‹ Displaying the phone book ›Phonebook‹ Redialing ›Redial‹ Displaying accepted calls ›Received calls‹ Dialing a phone number ›Dial number‹ List of messages ›Messages‹ Call up Bluetooth devices ›Bluetooth‹ Navigation* General information Function Command Navigation menu ›Navigation‹ Opening the destination input ›Enter address‹ Entering the address ›Enter address‹ Opening destination guidance ›Guidance‹ Starting destination guidance ›Start guidance‹ Terminating destination guidance ›Stop guidance‹ Opening the home address ›Home address‹ Opening the route criteria ›Route preference‹ Opening the route ›Route information‹ Switching on the spoken instructions ›Switch on voice instructions‹ Repeating a spoken instruction ›Repeat voice instructions‹ Switching off the spoken instructions ›Switch off voice instructions‹ Displaying the address book ›Address book‹ Displaying the last destinations ›Last destinations‹ Opening the traffic bulletins ›Traffic Info‹ Special destinations ›Points of interest‹ 262 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 ›Map facing north‹ Map in the direction of travel ›Map in direction of travel‹ Perspective map ›Map perspective view‹ Automatic scaling of the map ›Map with automatic scaling‹ Scale...feet ›Map scale ... feet‹ Scale...miles ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale 5 miles Split screen settings Function Command Split screen ›Switch on splitscreen‹ Switching off the split screen ›Turn off split screen‹ Adapting the split screen ›Split screen content‹ Split screen, map facing north ›Split screen map facing north‹ Split screen, current position ›Split screen current position‹ Split screen, direction of travel ›Split screen map in direction of travel‹ Split screen, perspective ›Split screen perspective‹ Split screen, wider intersection zoom ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹ Split screen scale...feet ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split screen scale 100 feet Split screen scale...miles ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split screen scale 5 miles Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹ Split screen, computer ›Split screen on board info‹ Split screen, trip computer ›Splitscreen trip computer‹ Automatically scaling the split screen ›Split screen automatic scaling‹ 263 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Driving tips Map facing north Navigation ›Map‹ Communication Entertainment Displaying the map Mobility Command Reference Function Controls At a glance Map Short commands for voice activation system Destination guidance with intermediate destinations Function Command New destination entry ›Enter address‹ Trip list ›Stored trips‹ Contacts* Function Command My contacts ›My contacts‹ Opening the contacts ›Contacts‹ New contact ›New contact‹ BMW Assist* Function Command Opening BMW Assist ›B M W Assist‹ Opening BMW Search ›B M W Search‹ Vehicle information Owner's Manual Function Command Opening the Owner's Manual ›Display Owner's Manual‹ Opening the Quick Reference ›Quick reference‹ Opening the keyword search ›Owner's Manual‹ Opening Search by pictures ›Search by pictures‹ Computer Function Command Opening the computer ›Onboard info‹ Opening the trip computer ›Trip computer‹ 264 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Command Opening the vehicle information ›Vehicle info‹ Opening the vehicle status ›Vehicle status‹ Controls Function At a glance Vehicle Adjusting Vehicle Command Opening the main menu ›Main menu‹ Opening the settings ›Settings‹ Opening the options ›Options‹ Info display of the instrument cluster ›Info Display‹ Central display settings ›Control display‹ Opening the time and date settings ›Time and date‹ Opening the language and unit settings ›Language and units‹ Opening the speed limit settings ›Speed‹ Opening the light settings ›Lighting‹ Opening the door lock settings ›Door locks‹ Opening the profiles ›Profiles‹ Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Function Equipment* Command Opening the air conditioning settings ›Climate‹ Opening the Head-up Display settings ›head up display‹ Enabling the rear seat ›Allow rear control‹ 265 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Function Everything from A to Z Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ tem 101 ACC Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go 107 Accessories and parts 7 Activated-charcoal filter 130 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion 98 Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, ACC 107 Active seat, front 50 Active seat ventilation, front 51 Active seat ventilation, rear 53 Active Steering, integral 102 Adaptive brake assistant 101 Adaptive brake lights, refer to Brake force display 100 Adaptive light control 87 Adaptive light control, bulb re‐ placement 241 Additives, oil 236 Adjustments, seats/head re‐ straints 48 After washing vehicle 252 Airbags 90 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ culated-air mode 129 Air distribution, manual 128 Air drying, refer to Cooling function 130 Air pressure, tires 227 Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ tion 131 Air volume, automatic climate control 129 Alarm system 42 Alarm, unintentional 43 All around the center con‐ sole 17 All around the headliner 18 All around the steering wheel 12 ALL program, automatic cli‐ mate control 130 All-season tires, refer to Win‐ ter tires 231 Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 135 Alternative oil types 236 AM/FM station 174 Announcement, navigation, refer to Spoken instruc‐ tions 163 Antifreeze, washer fluid 72 Antilock Brake System, ABS 101 Anti-slip control, refer to DSC 101 Approved engine oils 236 Armrest, refer to Center arm‐ rest 141 Ashtray 136 Assist 216 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ tance 247 Assistance when driving off 106 Audio playback 181 AUTO intensity 129 Automatic car wash 251 Automatic climate con‐ trol 128 Automatic Cruise Control with Stop & Go 107 Automatic Curb Monitor 59 Automatic deactivation, front passenger airbags 91 Automatic headlamp con‐ trol 87 Automatic Hold 68 Automatic locking 38 Automatic recirculated-air control 129 Automatic Soft Closing, doors 38 Automatic Soft Closing, tail‐ gate 39 Automatic transmission with Steptronic 72 Automatic trunk lid 39 AUTO program, automatic cli‐ mate control 129 AUTO program, intensity 129 AUX-IN port 192 Axle loads, weights 258 B Backrest curvature, refer to Lumbar support 50 Backrest, seats 48 Backrest width 50 Back seats, adjusting 51 Backup camera 120 Backup lamps, bulb replace‐ ment 243 Balance 172 Band-aids, refer to First aid kit 247 Bar for tow-starting/tow‐ ing 249 Basic position, rear seats 53 Bass 172 Battery replacement, remote control, rear entertain‐ ment 197 Battery replacement, vehicle battery 244 Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 32 Battery, vehicle 244 Before entering the car wash 251 Belts, safety belts 53 266 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 California Proposition 65 Warning 7 Camera, backup camera 122 Camera, care 253 Camera, Side View 123 Camera, Top View 120 267 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Controls Driving tips Navigation Communication Entertainment Climate control wind‐ shield 147 Clock 76 Closing/opening from in‐ side 38 Closing/opening via door lock 37 Closing/opening with remote control 35 Clothes hooks 142 Collision warning, iBrake 112 Combination instrument 14 Combination instrument, elec‐ tronic displays 16 Combination switch, refer to Turn signals 70 Combination switch, refer to Wiper system 70 Comfort Access 41 COMFORT program, Dynamic Driving Control 105 Computer 78 Concierge service 217 Condensation on win‐ dows 129 Condensation under the vehi‐ cle 148 Condition Based Service CBS 238 Confirmation signal 37 Contacts 213 Control Display 19 Control Display, care 253 Control Display, settings 80 Controller 19 Control systems, driving sta‐ bility 101 Convenient opening 36 Convenient operation 37 Coolant 237 Coolant temperature 76 Cooling function 130 Cooling, maximum 129 Cooling system 237 Corrosion on brake discs 148 Cruise control 114 Cruise control, active with stop-and-go 107 Mobility C Can holder, refer to Cu‐ pholder 142 Car battery 244 Car care products 252 Care, vehicle 252 Cargo 148 Cargo straps, securing cargo 149 Car key, refer to Remote con‐ trol 32 Carpet, care 253 Car wash 251 Catalytic converter, refer to Hot exhaust system 146 Category details, special des‐ tinations 157 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ ice 238 CD/DVD 181 CD/DVD player, rear 196 CDs, storing 187 Cell phone 204 Center armrest 141 Center console 17 Central locking system 35 Central screen, refer to Control Display 19 Changes, technical, refer to Safety 6 Changing parts 240 Changing wheels/tires 231 Check Control 83 Children, seating position 61 Children, transporting safely 61 Child restraint fixing sys‐ tem 61 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 62 Child restraint fixing systems, mounting 61 Child-safety locks 64 Child seat, mounting 61 Child seats 61 Chrome parts, care 252 Cigarette lighter 136 Climate control 128 Reference Beverage holder, cu‐ pholder 142 Blinds, sun protection 45 Bluetooth connection, activat‐ ing/deactivating 205 BMW Assist 216 BMW EfficientDynamics, refer to Saving fuel 150 BMW homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW Maintenance Sys‐ tem 238 BMW Search 218 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ pholder 142 Brake assistant 101 Brake assistant, adaptive 101 Brake discs, breaking in 146 Brake force display 100 Brake lamps, brake force dis‐ play 100 Brake lamps, bulb replace‐ ment 242 Brake lights, adaptive 100 Brake pads, breaking in 146 Braking, notes 147 Breakdown assis‐ tance 246, 247 Breaking in 146 Brightness of Control Dis‐ play 81 Bulb replacement 240 Bulb replacement, front 241 Bulb replacement, rear 242 Bulbs and lamps 240 Button, Start/Stop 65 Bypassing, see starting aid 247 Everything from A to Z Cruising range 77 Cupholder 142 Curb weight 258 Current fuel consumption 76 Current location, storing 156 Customer Relations 219 D Damage, tires 230 Damping Control, dy‐ namic 102 Data, technical 256 Date 76 Daytime running lights 87 Defrosting, refer to Windows, defrosting 129 Destination guidance 161 Destination guidance with in‐ termediate destinations 160 Destination input, naviga‐ tion 154 Detour, selecting 167 Digital clock 76 Digital radio 175 Dimensions 256 Dimmable mirrors 59 Direction indicator, refer to Turn signals 70 Displacement, engine 257 Display, instrument clus‐ ter 75 Display in windshield 126 Display lighting, refer to Instru‐ ment lighting 89 Displays 14 Displays, care 253 Disposal, coolant 237 Disposal, vehicle battery 244 Distance control, refer to PDC 115 Distance, selecting for ACC 108 Divided screen view, split screen 23 Door lock, refer to Remote control 32 Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐ ing 38 Drive-off assistant 106 Drive-off assistant, refer to DSC 101 Driving instructions, breaking in 146 Driving notes, general 146 Driving stability control sys‐ tems 101 Driving tips 146 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 101 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol 101 DVD/CD 181 DVD/CD notes 186 DVD/CD player, rear 196 DVD changer 185 DVD settings 184 DVDs, storing 187 DVD, video 183 Dynamic Damping Con‐ trol 102 Dynamic destination guid‐ ance 162 Dynamic Drive 102 Dynamic Driving Control 103 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 101 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 101 E EfficientDynamics, refer to Saving fuel 150 Electronic displays, instru‐ ment cluster 16 Electronic engine oil level check 236 Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to DSC 101 Emergency detection, remote control 33 Emergency release, door lock 38 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 224 Emergency release, parking brake 67 Emergency Request 246 Emergency service, refer to Roadside Assistance 247 Emergency start function, en‐ gine start 33 Emergency unlocking, tail‐ gate 41 Energy Control 76 Energy regeneration 77 Engine compartment 234 Engine compartment, working in 234 Engine coolant 237 Engine oil 236 Engine oil, adding 236 Engine oil additives 236 Engine oil filler neck 236 Engine oil temperature 76 Engine oil types, alterna‐ tive 236 Engine oil types, ap‐ proved 236 Engine specifications 257 Engine start during malfunc‐ tion 33 Engine start, Help 247 Engine start, refer to Starting the engine 65 Engine stop 66 Engine temperature 76 Equalizer 172 Equipment, interior 134 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ gram, refer to DSC 101 Exchanging wheels/tires 231 Exhaust system 146 Exterior mirrors 58 External devices 192 External start 247 External temperature dis‐ play 75 External temperature warn‐ ing 75 Eyes for securing cargo 149 268 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 H Hand brake, refer to Parking brake 66 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ nating code 135 Hazard warning flashers 246 HD Radio 175 Head airbags 90 Headlamp control, auto‐ matic 87 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐ ture 86 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐ ture via remote control 36 Headlamp flasher 70 Headlamp glass 241 Headlamps 241 Headlamps, care 251 Headlamp washer system 70 Headliner 18 Headphones, rear entertain‐ ment 199 Head restraints 48 Head restraints, front 55 Head restraints, rear 56 Head-up Display 126 Head-up Display, care 253 I iBrake, collision warning 112 Ice warning, refer to External temperature warning 75 Icy roads, refer to External temperature warning 75 Identification marks, tires 229 Identification number, refer to Engine compartment 234 iDrive 19 Ignition key, refer to Remote control 32 Ignition off 65 Ignition on 65 Indication of a flat tire 93, 96 Indicator and warning mes‐ sages 14 Indicator lamps 14 Individual air distribution 128 Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 33 Inflation pressure monitor, tires 92 Inflation pressure, tires 227 269 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Controls Driving tips Navigation Garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 134 Gas station recommenda‐ tion 163 Gear change, automatic trans‐ mission 73 General driving notes 146 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐ amic glass sunroof 45 Glove compartment 140 GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐ gation system 154 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ proved 258 Gross weight, permissible for trailer towing 258 Communication Entertainment Fader 172 Failure message, refer to Check Control 83 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ tional alarm 43 Fan, refer to Air volume 129 Fault displays, refer to Check Control 83 Filler neck for engine oil 236 Fine wood, care 252 First aid kit 247 Fitting for towing, refer to Tow fitting 248 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 95 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 92 Flat tire, warning lamp 93, 96 Flat tire, wheel change 243 Flooding 147 Floor carpet, care 253 Floor mats, care 253 FM/AM station 174 Fold-out position, windshield wipers 72 Foot brake 147 Front airbags 90 Front fog lamps 89 Front fog lamps, front, bulb re‐ placement 242 Front lamps 241 Front passenger airbags, au‐ tomatic deactivation 91 Front passenger airbags, indi‐ cator lamp 92 Front seats, adjusting 48 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 95 Fuel cap 224 Fuel consumption, current 76 Fuel filler flap 224 Fuel gauge 77 Fuel quality 226 Fuel, tank capacity 258 Fuse 245 Heavy cargo, stowing 149 Height, seats 48 Height with roof-mounted aer‐ ial, vehicle 256 High-beam assistant 88 High beams 70 High beams/low beams, refer to High-beam assistant 88 Hills 147 Hill start assistant, refer to Drive-off assistant 106 Holder for beverages 142 Homepage 6 Hood 234 Horn 12 Hotel function, tailgate 41 Hot exhaust system 146 House number, entering for navigation 155 HUD, Head-up Display 126 Hydroplaning 147 Mobility G Reference F Everything from A to Z Inflation pressure warning, tires 95 Info display 75 Information on navigation data 167 Initialization, Integral Active Steering 102 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 95 Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon‐ itor TPM 93 Instrument cluster 14, 75 Instrument cluster, electronic displays 16 Instrument lighting 89 Integral Active Steering 102 Integrated key 32 Integrated universal remote control 134 Intensity, AUTO program 129 Interactive map 159 Interior equipment 134 Interior lamps 89 Interior lamps via remote con‐ trol 36 Interior motion sensor 43 Interior rearview and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature 59 Interior rearview mirror 59 Intermediate destina‐ tions 160 Internet page 6 Intersection, entering for navi‐ gation 155 Interval display, service re‐ quirements 82 iPod/iPhone 193 J Jacking points for the vehicle jack 244 Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 244 Joystick, automatic transmis‐ sion 73 K Key/remote control 32 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Access 41 Key Memory, refer to Personal Profile 33 Kickdown, automatic trans‐ mission 73 Knee airbag 90 L Lamp replacement 240 Lamp replacement, front 241 Lamp replacement, rear 242 Lamps 86 Lamps and bulbs 240 Lane departure warning 97 Lane margin, warning 97 Language on Control Dis‐ play 81 Lashing eyes, securing cargo 149 LATCH child restraint fixing system 62 Leather, care 252 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ odes 240 Length, vehicle 257 Letters and numbers, enter‐ ing 24 License plate lamp, bulb re‐ placement 242 Light-alloy wheels, care 252 Light control 87 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 240 Lighter, front 136 Lighting 86 Lighting via remote con‐ trol 36 Light switch 86 Load 149 Loading 148 Loading position 139 Lock, door 37 Locking/unlocking from in‐ side 38 Locking/unlocking via door lock 37 Locking/unlocking with re‐ mote control 35 Locking, automatic 38 Locking, central 35 Locking via tailgate 39 Lock, power window 45 Locks, doors, and win‐ dows 64 Low beams 86 Low beams, automatic, refer to High-beam assistant 88 Lower back support 50 Lug bolt lock 244 Luggage compartment lid 38 Luggage rack, refer to Roofmounted luggage rack 149 Lumbar support 50 M Maintenance 238 Maintenance require‐ ments 238 Maintenance, service require‐ ments 82 Maintenance system, BMW 238 Malfunction displays, refer to Check Control 83 Malfunction, self-leveling sus‐ pension 103 Manual air distribution 128 Manual air volume 129 Manual brake, refer to Parking brake 66 Manual mode, transmis‐ sion 73 Manual operation, backup camera 120 Manual operation, door lock 38 Manual operation, exterior mir‐ rors 58 270 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 O OBD Onboard Diagnos‐ tics 238 Obstacle marking, backup camera 121 Odometer 75 Oil 236 Oil, adding 236 Oil additives 236 Oil change interval, service re‐ quirements 82 Oil filler neck 236 Oil level check 236 Oil types, alternative 236 Oil types, approved 236 Old batteries, disposal 244 Onboard computer, refer to Computer 78 Paint, vehicle 252 Pairing, mobile phone 204 Panic mode 36 Panoramic glass sunroof 45 Park Distance Control PDC 115 Parked-car ventilation 133 Parked vehicle, condensa‐ tion 148 Parking aid, refer to PDC 115 Parking brake 66 Parking lamps 86 Parking lamps, bulb replace‐ ment 242 Parking with Auto Hold 68 Parts and accessories 7 Passenger side mirror, tilting downward 59 Pathway lines, backup cam‐ era 120 PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol 115 Pedestrian detection, refer to Night Vision 123 People detection, refer to Night Vision 123 Permissible axle load 258 Personal Profile 33 271 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Controls Driving tips P Navigation Navigation 154 Navigation data 167 Neck restraints, front, refer to Head restraints 55 Neck restraints, rear, refer to Head restraints 56 New wheels and tires 231 Night Vision with pedestrian detection 123 NORMAL program, Dynamic Driving Control 105 Notes 6 Number of cylinders, en‐ gine 257 Nylon rope for tow-starting/ towing 250 Communication Entertainment N Onboard Diagnostics OBD 238 Onboard monitor, refer to Control Display 19 Opening/closing from in‐ side 38 Opening/closing via door lock 37 Opening/closing with remote control 35 Operating concept, iDrive 19 Outside air, refer to Automatic recirculated-air control 129 Outside temperature warn‐ ing 75 Overheating of engine, refer to Coolant temperature 76 Mobility MP3 player 192 Multi-function hook 143 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 12 Multimedia 181 Music collection 187 Music search 189 Music, storing 187 Reference Manual operation, fuel filler flap 224 Manual operation, Park Dis‐ tance Control PDC 116 Manual operation, parking brake 67 Manual operation, Side View 122 Manual operation, Top View 119 Map, destination entry 158 Map in split screen 164 Map view 164 Marking on approved tires 231 Marking, run-flat tires 232 Massage seat, front 50 Master key, refer to Remote control 32 Maximum cooling 129 Maximum speed, display 84 Maximum speed, winter tires 231 Measure, units of 81 Medical kit 247 Memory for seat, mirrors, steering wheel 57 Menu in instrument clus‐ ter 77 Menus, operating, iDrive 19 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ ing concept 20 Message list, traffic bulle‐ tins 165 Microfilter 130 Minimum tread, tires 230 Mirror 58 Mirror memory 57 Mobile communication devi‐ ces in the vehicle 147 Mobile phone 204 Modifications, technical, refer to Safety 6 Moisture in headlamp 241 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ play 19 Mounting of child restraint fix‐ ing systems 61 Everything from A to Z Pinch protection system, glass sunroof 46 Pinch protection system, win‐ dows 44 Plastic, care 253 Position, storing 156 Postal code, entering in navi‐ gation 155 Power failure 244 Power output, engine 257 Power windows 44 Pressure monitor, tires 92 Pressure, tire air pres‐ sure 227 Pressure warning, tires 95 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ file 33 Programmable memory but‐ tons, iDrive 23 Protective function, glass sun‐ roof 46 Protective function, win‐ dows 44 Push-and-turn switch, refer to Controller 19 R Radiator fluid 237 Radio 174 Radio-operated key, refer to Remote control 32 Radio ready state 65 Rain sensor 71 Random 182 Random playback 182 RDS 175 Rear automatic climate con‐ trol 132 Rear axle steering 102 Rear entertainment 196 Rear fog lamp, bulb replace‐ ment 243 Rear lamps 242 Rear seats, adjusting 51 Rear seats, basic position 53 Rear sockets 137 Rearview mirror 58 Rear window defroster 130 Recirculated-air mode 129 Recommended tire brands 231 Refueling 224 Release tool 240 Remaining range 77 Remote control/key 32 Remote control, malfunc‐ tion 37 Remote control, rear enter‐ tainment 197 Remote control, univer‐ sal 134 Replacement fuse 245 Replacing parts 240 Replacing wheels/tires 231 Reporting safety defects 8 Reserve warning, refer to Range 77 Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon‐ itor TPM 93 Residual heat, automatic cli‐ mate control 130 Retaining straps, securing cargo 149 Retreaded tires 231 Road, avoiding 162 Road detour 162 Roadside Assistance 217 Roadside parking lamps 87 Roller sunblinds 45 Roll stabilization, refer to Dy‐ namic Drive 102 Roof load capacity 258 Roof-mounted luggage rack 149 Rope for tow-starting/tow‐ ing 250 Route 162 Route criteria, route 162 Route, displaying 162 Route section, bypassing 163 RPM, engine 257 RSC Runflat System Compo‐ nent, refer to Run-flat tires 232 Rubber components, care 252 Run-flat tires 232 Run-flat tires, flat tire 93, 96 S Safe braking 147 Safety 6 Safety belt reminder 54 Safety belts 53 Safety belts, care 253 Safety switch, windows 45 Safety systems, airbags 90 Satellite radio 176 Saving fuel 150 Scale, changing during navi‐ gation 164 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ play 19 Screw driver 240 Screw thread for tow fit‐ ting 249 Search, refer to BMW Search 218 Seat belts, refer to Safety belts 53 Seat heating, front 50 Seat heating, rear 53 Seating position for chil‐ dren 61 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory 57 Seats 48 Seats, rear, adjusting 51 Seat ventilation, front 51 Seat ventilation, rear 53 Selection list in instrument cluster 77 Selector lever, automatic transmission 73 Self-leveling suspension, air suspension 103 Self-leveling suspension, mal‐ function 103 Sensors, care 253 Service and warranty 7 272 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 T Tachometer 76 Tail and brake lamps 242 Tailgate 38 Tailgate, automatic 39 273 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 At a glance Controls Driving tips Navigation Communication Entertainment Tailgate, emergency unlock‐ ing 41 Tailgate, hotel function 41 Tailgate via remote control 36 Tail lamps 242 Tail lamps, bulb replace‐ ment 242 Technical changes, refer to Safety 6 Technical data 256 Telephone 204 TeleService 217 Temperature, automatic cli‐ mate control 129 Temperature display, external temperature 75 Temperature, engine oil 76 Terminal 0 65 Terminal 15 65 Terminal R 65 Terminal, starting aid 247 Theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 42 Theft protection, lug bolts 244 Theft protection, refer to Cen‐ tral locking system 35 Thermal camera, refer to Night Vision 123 Thigh support 48 Through-loading system 137 Tilt alarm sensor 43 Tilt, seats 48 Tire age 231 Tire damage 230 Tire identification marks 229 Tire inflation pressure 227 Tire inflation pressure monitor, refer to FTM 95 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 92 Tires, changing 231 Tires, everything on wheels and tires 227 Tires, flat tire 244 Tires, run-flat tires 232 Tire tread 230 Toll roads, route 162 Mobility Sport program, transmis‐ sion 73 Stability control systems 101 Start/Stop button 65 Start function during malfunc‐ tion 33 Starting aid 247 Starting the engine 65 State/province, selecting for navigation 154 Stations, stored 180 Station, storing 174 Status display, tires 93 Status information, iDrive 22 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steering, Integral Active Steering 102 Steering wheel, adjusting 59 Steering wheel heating 60 Steering wheel memory 57 Steptronic, automatic trans‐ mission 72 Stopping the engine 66 Storage compartment in the center console 142 Storage compartments 140 Storage compartments, loca‐ tions 140 Storage, tires 232 Storing the vehicle 253 Street, entering for naviga‐ tion 155 Summer tires, tread 230 Surround View 118 Suspension settings 103 Switch for Dynamic Driving Control 103 Switch-on times, parked-car ventilation 133 Switch, refer to Cockpit 12 Symbols 6 Reference Service requirements, CBS Condition Based Serv‐ ice 238 Service requirements, dis‐ play 82 Service, Roadside Assis‐ tance 247 Settings on Control Dis‐ play 80 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ rors, steering wheel 57 Shifting, automatic transmis‐ sion 72 Short commands 259 Shoulder support 50 Side airbags 90 Side View 122 Signaling, horn 12 Signals when unlocking 37 Sitting safely 48 Size 256 Ski and snowboard bag 139 Slide/tilt glass roof 45 Smallest turning circle 257 Smoker's package 136 Snap-in adapter, mobile phone 212 Snow chains 232 Socket 136 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ nostics 238 Spare fuse 245 Special destinations, naviga‐ tion 157 Specified oil types 236 Speed limit detection 84 Speed limit, setting 78 Speedometer 14 Split screen 23 Split screen map set‐ tings 164 Spoken instructions, naviga‐ tion 163 SPORT+ program, Dynamic Driving Control 104 SPORT program, Dynamic Driving Control 104 Everything from A to Z Tone 172 Tool kit 240 Tools 240 Top View 118 Torque, engine 257 Total vehicle weight 258 Tow fitting 248 Towing 248 Town/city, navigation 154 Tow-starting 248 Tow truck 250 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor 92 Traction control 101 TRACTION program, Dynamic Driving Control 104 Traffic bulletins, naviga‐ tion 165 Traffic obstruction, bypass‐ ing 167 Traffic situation/gray card 166 Transmission, automatic 72 Transporting children safely 61 Tread, tires 230 Treble, tone 172 Trip computer 79 Triple turn signal activa‐ tion 70 Trip odometer 75 Truck for tow-starting/tow‐ ing 250 Trunk 137 Trunk cover 137 Trunk, expanding 137 Trunk lid 38 Trunk lid, automatic 39 Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ ing 41 Trunk lid, hotel function 41 Trunk lid via remote con‐ trol 36 Trunk partition 138 Trunk, storage compart‐ ments 143 Turning circle 257 Turning circle lines, backup camera 121 Turn signals, front, bulb re‐ placement 241 Turn signals, operation 70 Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ placement 242 U Unintentional alarm 43 Units of measure 81 Universal remote control 134 Unlock button, automatic transmission 73 Unlocking/locking from in‐ side 38 Unlocking/locking via door lock 37 Unlocking/locking with remote control 35 Upholstery care 252 USB audio interface 193 USB interface 140 V Variable Damping Control, re‐ fer to Dynamic Damping Control 102 Variable steering, Integral Ac‐ tive Steering 102 Vehicle battery 244 Vehicle battery, replacing 244 Vehicle, breaking in 146 Vehicle care 252 Vehicle identification number, refer to Identification number in the engine compart‐ ment 234 Vehicle jack 244 Vehicle paint 252 Vehicle storage 253 Vehicle wash 251 Ventilation 131 Ventilation, refer to Parked-car ventilation 133 Version of navigation data 167 Video playback 183 Voice activation, mobile phone 210 Voice activation, short com‐ mands 259 Voice activation system 25 Volume, setting 172 W Warning lamps 14 Warning messages, refer to Check Control 83 Warning triangle 247 Washer fluid 72 Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐ pacity 258 Washer nozzles, wind‐ shield 71 Washer system 70 Washing, vehicle 251 Water on roads 147 Weather Band 175 Weights 258 Welcome lamps 86 Wheel base, vehicle 257 Wheel change 243 Wheels, changing 231 Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 227 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 95 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 92 Width with mirrors, vehi‐ cle 256 Width without mirrors, vehi‐ cle 256 Window defroster, rear 130 Windows, powered 44 Windshield, climate con‐ trol 147 Windshield washer fluid 72 Windshield washer noz‐ zles 71 274 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Driving tips Controls At a glance Windshield washer sys‐ tem 70 Windshield wiper 70 Windshield wipers, fold-out position 72 Winter storage, care 253 Winter tires, suitable tires 231 Winter tires, tread 230 Wiper blades, replacing 240 Wiper fluid 72 Wiper system 70 Wood, care 252 Word match concept, naviga‐ tion 24 Wrench 240 X Navigation Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐ placement 241 Y 275 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500 Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Your individual vehicle 6 More about BMW The Ultimate Driving Machine 01 41 2 604 413 ue bmwusa.com *BL260441300K* Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Page Mode : UseNone Signing Date : 2010:02:02 07:29:04+01:00 Signing Authority : ARE Acrobat Product v8.0 P23 0002337 Document Usage Rights : FullSave Annotation Usage Rights : Create, Delete, Modify, Copy, Import, Export Form Usage Rights : Add, FillIn, Delete, SubmitStandalone Signature Usage Rights : Modify XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39 Create Date : 2009:10:26 11:01:18+01:00 Creator Tool : XSL Formatter V4.3 R1 (4,3,2008,0424) for Windows Modify Date : 2010:02:02 07:29:13+01:00 Metadata Date : 2010:02:02 07:29:13+01:00 Producer : Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows) Trapped : False Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:f4f7c1b8-9b2a-4e11-ae68-fd52ea740d48 Instance ID : uuid:badbcdda-4ef3-4195-9640-66ed9e1f6743 Has XFA : No Page Count : 277 Page Layout : OneColumn Creator : XSL Formatter V4.3 R1 (4,3,2008,0424) for WindowsEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools